Grand Cherokee SRT (2010) - Car JEEP - Free user manual and instructions

Product Type	SUV (Sport Utility Vehicle)
Brand	Jeep
Model	Grand Cherokee SRT (2010)
Manufacturer	Chrysler LLC
Engine	6.1L HEMI V8
Horsepower	420 hp @ 6,200 rpm
Torque	420 lb-ft @ 4,800 rpm
Transmission	5-speed automatic
Drivetrain	Quadra-Trac all-wheel drive
Fuel Type	Gasoline (premium recommended)
Fuel Capacity	75.7 L (20.0 gal)
Curb Weight	2,300 kg (5,070 lb)
Length	4,750 mm (187 in)
Width	1,930 mm (76 in)
Height	1,680 mm (66 in)
Wheelbase	2,900 mm (114 in)
Seating Capacity	5
Cargo Volume (rear seats up)	0.95 m³ (33.5 cu ft)
Brakes	Ventilated disc with ABS
Safety Features	ESC, TCS, front/side airbags, roll mitigation
Tire Size	P245/45R20
Service Interval	Oil change every 8,000 km (5,000 mi)

Frequently Asked Questions - Grand Cherokee SRT (2010) JEEP

What type of oil does the 2010 Jeep Grand Cherokee SRT require?

The 2010 Grand Cherokee SRT requires 5W-20 synthetic oil with API certification. The oil capacity is approximately 6.6 quarts (6.2 L) including filter change.

How do I reset the oil change light on a 2010 Grand Cherokee SRT?

To reset the oil change light: turn ignition to ON (do not start engine), slowly press and release the accelerator pedal three times within 10 seconds, then turn ignition OFF. Start the engine to verify the light is reset.

What is the towing capacity of the 2010 Grand Cherokee SRT?

The 2010 Grand Cherokee SRT has a towing capacity of 5,000 lbs (2,268 kg) when properly equipped. Always use a weight-distributing hitch for trailers over 3,500 lbs.

What is the recommended tire pressure for the 2010 Grand Cherokee SRT?

The recommended tire pressure is 36 psi (248 kPa) for both front and rear tires when cold. Check monthly and before long trips.

How do I pair a Bluetooth phone with the Uconnect system?

Ensure Bluetooth is enabled on your phone. On the Uconnect screen, select 'Phone' > 'Settings' > 'Add Device'. Search for Uconnect on your phone and enter the PIN displayed on the screen (usually 0000). Accept the pairing request.

What type of coolant does the 2010 Grand Cherokee SRT use?

Use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile or equivalent HOAT (Hybrid Organic Acid Technology) coolant. Mix 50/50 with distilled water. The system capacity is about 13.5 quarts (12.8 L).

How often should I replace the spark plugs on the 2010 Grand Cherokee SRT?

Spark plugs should be replaced every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) due to the HEMI engine's high performance. Use OEM-specified plugs (NGK or equivalent).

What is the common issue with the 2010 Grand Cherokee SRT transmission?

Some owners report harsh shifting or transmission shudder in the 5-speed automatic. This often improves with a transmission fluid change using Mopar ATF+4 and ensuring proper fluid level. If persists, have the TCM reflashed at a dealership.

Can I use regular gas in the 2010 Grand Cherokee SRT?

The 2010 Grand Cherokee SRT requires premium unleaded gasoline (91 octane or higher) to achieve full performance and avoid engine knock. Using regular gas may reduce power and fuel economy.

How do I change the cabin air filter on the 2010 Grand Cherokee SRT?

The cabin air filter is located behind the glove box. Open the glove box, squeeze the sides to release it fully, then remove the filter cover. Slide out the old filter and install a new one with the airflow arrows pointing downward. Replace every 12,000 miles (19,000 km).

USER MANUAL Grand Cherokee SRT (2010) JEEP

Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group LLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all essentials that are traditional to our vehicles.

This Owner's Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle. It is supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet, located on the DVD, and various customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to read these publications carefully. Following the instructions and recommendations in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.

NOTE: After you read them manual, it should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referencing and remain with the vehicle when sold, so that thenew owner will be aware of falls safety warnings.

When it comes to service, remember that your authorized dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained technicians and genuine MOPAR® parts, and cares about your satisfaction.

ROLLOVERWARNING

Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. This vehicle has a higher ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than many passenger cars. It is capable of performing better in a wide variety of off-road applications. Driven in an unsafe manner, all vehicles can go out of control. Because of the higher center of gravity, if this vehicle is out of control it may roll over when some other vehicles may not.

Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers, or other unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle

control. Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result in an accident, rollover of the vehicle, and severe or fatal injury. Drive carefully.

WARNING: HIGHER ROLLOVER RISK Avoid Abrupt Maneuvers and Excessive Speed. Always Buckle Up. See Owner's Manual For Further Information

80bfe0f0

RolloverWarningLabel

Failuretousedriverandpassengerseatbeltsprovided is a major cause of severe or fatal injury. In fact, the U.S. government notes that the universal use of existing seat belts could cut the highway death toll by 10,000 or more each year and could reduce disabling injuries by two million annually. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. Always buckle up.

HOWTOUSETHISMANUAL

Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section contains the information you desire.

Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and illustrations may differ from your vehicle's equipment

The detailed index at the back of this Owner's Manual contains a complete listing of all subjects.

Consult the following table for a description of the symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this Owner's Manual:

WATER-IN FUEL REAR WINDOW WIPER WINDSHIELD WIPER INTERNETENT EXTERIOR BULB FAILURE HIGH BEAM TURN SIGNALS UPPER AIR OUTLET HEATED SEAT LOW DOOR LOCK ADJUSTABLE PEDALS ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL ELECTRONIC STABILITY PROGRAM/ BRAKE ASSIST SYSTEM BRAKE TEELE REAR WINDOW INTERNETENT WIPER WINDSHIELD WASHER MASTER LIGHTING SWITCH LOW BEAM KEY ACTIVATE (POWER OUTLET) UPPED AND LOWER AIR OUTLET HEATED SEAT HIGH WHOW LIFT TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR HILL DESCEPT CONTROL BRAKE SYSTEM WARNING WARNING BRAKE FUEL-FILL SIDE REAR WINDOW WASHER WINDSHIELD WASHER FLUID LEVEL DOME LIGHT FRONT FOG LIGHT HOOD RELEASE LOWER AIR OUTLET RECIRCULATION CONVERTIBLE 4 WINDOW DOWN TRACTION CONTROL AWDI (ABS) FAILURE OF ANTHLOCK DRAMING SYSTEM ENCINE OIL REAR WINDOW DETROST WINDSHIELD ELECTRICALLY HEATERES PARK LIGHTS REAR FOG LAMP LIFTGATE RELEASE AND LIFTGATE OFFER DEFROST AND LOWER AIR OUTLET VENTILATING FAX WHOW LOCK ELECTRONIC THIRITILE CONTROL 4WDI FOUR WHEEL DRIVE BRAKE SYSTEM WARNING WARNING BRAKE BATTERY CHARGING HEATED MIRROR WINDSHIELD DETROST INTESTRUMENT PANEL ILLUMINATION SEAT BELT SLIDING DOOR TRUNK / DECK RELEASE AIR CONDITIONING CHILD SEAT TETHER ANCHOR WARNING RECOPTION BUTTON TOW/HAUL GLOW PLUG POWER STEERING FLUID WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHING SIDE AIRSAG AIRSAG SLIDING DOOR EMERGENCY RELEASE HANDLE LIGHTER LOWER ANCHORS AND TETHER FOR CHILDREN (LATCH) UCONNECT THE BUTTON HAZARD FOUR WHEEL DRIVE LOW BALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT TRANSM OIL TERRP ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURES SRS AIRBAG OUTLENDINAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF DOOR AIAR CONVERTIBLE TOP DOWN CONVERTIBLE TOP UP HORN LEFT GROWTH'S MANUAL ISO A/C PUSH AIR CONDITIONER ELECTRONIC STABILITY CONTROL OFF

WARNINGSANDCAUTIONS

This Owner's Manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures that could result in an accident or bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you do not read this entire manual, you may miss important information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.

VEHICLEIDENTIFICATIONNUMBER

The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on a label located on the left front corner of the instrument panel pad, visible from outside of the vehicle through the windshield. This number also appears on the Automobile Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle. Save this label for a convenient record of your vehicle identification number and optional equipment.

Close-up of a car interior showing a hand cursor pointing to a small component, with no visible text or symbols.

VINLocation

NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.

VEHICLEMODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS

WARNING!

Anymodificationsoralterationstothisvehiclecould seriouslyaffectitsroadworthinessandsafetyand mayleadtoanaccidentresultinginseriousinjuryor death.

THINGSTOKNOWBEFORESTARTINGYOURVEHICLE

CONTENTS

■A Word About Your Keys....12

□Wireless Ignition Node (WIN)....12

□KeyFOB

□Removing Key FOB From Ignition....13

□Key-In-Ignition Reminder....15

■Sentry Key ^® 15

□Replacement Keys.... 16

□Customer Key Programming....16

□ General Information 17

■ Vehicle Security Alarm — If Equipped ..... 17

□Rearming The System 17

1 3□To Set The Alarm.... 1 7

□To Disarm The System 18

■Illuminated Entry 18

■ Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) 19

□To Unlock The Doors 19

□To Lock The Doors 20

□To Release The Liftgate Flipper Glass ..... 2 1

□Programming Additional Transmitters ..... 2 2

□Transmitter Battery Replacement....22

□General Information.... 23

■Remote Starting System — If Equipped . . . . . . 2 4

□How To Use Remote Start....24

■Door Locks 26

□Manual Door Locks.... 26

□Power Door Locks 27

□Child Protection Door Lock....28

■Windows.... 29

□Power Windows.... 29

□Wind Buffeting 32

■Liftgate 32

□Liftgate Flipper Glass 33

■ Occupant Restraints 34

□Lap/Shoulder Belts 36

□ Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions .... 37

□ Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . . 41

□ Energy Management Feature 41

□Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) Mode — If Equipped.... 4 2

□Seat Belt Pretensioners — If Equipped . . . . . 4 3

□Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System (BeltAlert®) 43

THINGSTOKNOWBEFORESTARTINGYOURVEHICLE11

□Seat Belts And Pregnant Women.... 4 4
□Seat Belt Extender 44
□Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) — Airbags.... 4 5
□Advanced Front Airbag Features ..... 4 7
□Airbag Deployment Sensors And Controls . . . 51
□Event Data Recorder (EDR) 58
□Child Restraints 60

■Engine Break-In Recommendations....70

■Safety Tips....71

□Transporting Passengers....71
□Exhaust Gas 71
□Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle 72
☐Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle 73

Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. This system consists of a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter and a Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) with integral ignition switch. You can insert the Key Fob into the ignition switch with either side up.

WirelessIgnitionNode(WIN)

The Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) operates similar to an ignition switch. It has four operating positions, three of which are detented and one spring-loaded. The detented positions are LOCK, ACC, and ON. The START position is a spring-loaded momentary contact position. When released from the START position, the switch automatically returns to the detented ON position.

1 2 3 4 B1f00719

WirelessIgnitionNode(WIN)

1—LOCK
2 — ACC (ACCESSORY)
3-ON
4 — START

THINGSTOKNOWBEFORESTARTINGYOURVEHICLE13

KeyFob

The Key Fob operates the ignition switch. It also contains the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter and an emergency key, which stores in the rear of the Key Fob.

The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle should the battery in the vehicle or the RKE transmitter go dead. The emergency key is also for locking the glove box. You can keep the emergency key with you when valet parking.

NOTE: Entering a vehicle using the emergency key with the theft alarm armed, will results in the alarm sounding. Insert the Key Fob (even if the Key Fob battery is dead) into the WIN to disarm theft alarm.

To remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latch at the top of the Key Fob sideways with your thumb and then pull the key out with your other hand.

Illustration of a car's side panel and its blade, no text or symbols present

020207436

EmergencyKeyRemoval

NOTE: You can insert the double-sided emergency key into the lock cylinders with either side up.

RemovingKeyFobFromIgnition

Place the shift lever in PARK. Turn the Key Fob to the OFF position and then remove the Key Fob.

14 THINGSTOKNOWBEFORESTARTINGYOURVEHICLE

NOTE:

• If you try to remove the Key Fob before you place the shift lever in PARK, it may become trapped temporarily in the ignition switch. If this occurs, rotate the key to the right slightly, then remove the Key Fob as described. If a malfunction occurs, the system will trap the key in the ignition switch to warn you that this safety feature is inoperable. The engine can be started and stopped, but the Key Fob cannot be removed until you obtain service.
• For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), the power window switches, radio, power sunroof (if equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front door will cancel this feature. The time for this feature is programmable. Refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — If

Equipped/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.

WARNING!

Neverleavechildrenaloneinavehicle.Leaving unattendedchildreninavehicleisdangerousfora numberofreasons.Achildorotherscouldbeseriouslyorfatallyinjured.DonotleavetheKeyFobin theignition.Achildcouldoperatepowerwindows, othercontrols,ormovethevehicle.

CAUTION!

An unlocked carisan invitation to thieves. Always remove Key Fob from the ignition and lockalldoors when leaving the vehicle unattended.

Key-In-IgnitionReminder

Opening the driver's door when the Key Fob is in the ignition and the ignition switch position is OFF or ACC, sounds a signal to remind you to remove the Key Fob.

NOTE: The Key-In-Ignition reminder only sounds when the Key Fob is placed in the OFF or ACC ignition position.

SENTRYKEY®

The Sentry Key®Immobilizer system prevents unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked.

The system uses the factory-mated Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter and Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation. Therefore, only Key Fobs that are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle. The

THINGSTOKNOWBEFORESTARTINGYOUR VEHICLE

system will shut the engine off in two seconds if an invalid Key Fob is used to start the engine.

After turning the ignition switch to the ON position, the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it indicates that there is a problem with the electronics. In addition, if the light begins to flash after the bulb check, it indicates that someone used an invalid Key Fob to start the engine. Either of these conditions will result in the engine being shut off after two seconds.

If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics. Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by an authorized dealer.

16 THINGSTOKNOWBEFORESTARTINGYOUR VEHICLE

NOTE:The Sentry Key®Immobilizer system is not compatible with aftermarket remote starting systems. Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of security protection.

All of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics.

ReplacementKeys

NOTE: Only Key Fobs that are programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle. Once a Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.

CAUTION!

AlwaysremovetheKeyFobsfromthevehicleand lockalldoorswhenleavingthevehicleunattended.

At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided with a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN). Keep the PIN in a secure location. This number is required for authorized dealer replacement of Key Fobs. Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an authorized dealer, this procedure consists of programming a blank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank Key Fob is one that has never been programmed.

NOTE: When having the Sentry Key® Immobilizer system serviced, bring all vehicle Key Fobs with you to the authorized dealer.

CustomerKeyProgramming

Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be performed at an authorized dealer.

GeneralInformation

The Sentry Key ^® system complies with FCC rules Part 15 and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following conditions:

• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference that may be received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

VEHICLESECURITYALARM—IFEQUIPPED

This Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors, liftgate, liftgate flipper glass, and ignition for unauthorized operation. When the alarm is activated, the Vehicle Security Alarm provides both audio and visual signals. The horn will sound, the headlights, park lamps and/or turn signals will flash repeatedly for three minutes. If the disturbance is still present (driver's door, passenger door, other doors, ignition) after three minutes, the headlights,

THINGSTOKNOWBEFORESTARTINGYOURVEHICLE17

park lamps and/or turn signals will flash for an additional 15 minutes.

NOTE: The Panic and Security alarms are quite different. Please take a moment to activate the Panic and the Security modes to hear the differences in the horn. In case one should go off in the future, you will need to know which mode has been activated in order to deactivate it.

RearmingTheSystem

If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to disarm it, the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn off the horn after three minutes, turn off all of the visual signals after 15 minutes, and then the Vehicle Security Alarm will rearm itself.

ToSettheAlarm

The alarm will set when you use the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to lock the doors and liftgate, or when you use the power door lock switch while the door is open. After all the doors are locked and closed, the

Vehicle Security Light (located in the instrument cluster) will flash rapidly for about 16 seconds to signal that the Vehicle Security Alarm is arming. During this 16 second arming period, opening any door or the liftgate will cancel the arming. If the Vehicle Security Alarm successfully arms, the Vehicle Security Light will flash at a slower rate to indicate the alarm is set.

ToDisarmtheSystem

To disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm, you will need to press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter or turn the ignition key to the ON position. If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in your absence, the horn will sound three times when you unlock the doors. Check the vehicle for tampering.

The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the Vehicle Security Alarm will arm unexpectedly. If you remain in the vehicle and lock the doors with the RKE transmitter, once the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed (after 16 seconds), when you pull the door handle to exit, the alarm will sound. If this occurs, press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm. You may also accidentally disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm by unlocking the driver's door with the key and then locking it. The door will be locked but the Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm.

ILLUMINATEDENTRY

The interior lights come on when you open any door or use the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to unlock any door. They will remain on for approximately 30 seconds after all doors are closed then fade to off.

The lights also will fade to off if you turn on the ignition after you close all the doors.

NOTE: None of the courtesy lights will operate if the dimmer control is in the "defeat" position (extreme downward position), unless the overhead map/reading lights are turned on manually.

REMOTEKEYLESSENTRY(RKE)

This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and liftgate, or activate the panic alarm, from distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a hand-held Key Fob with RKE transmitter. The RKE transmitter does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system.

NOTE: Inserting the Key Fob with RKE transmitter into the ignition switch disables all buttons on that RKE transmitter; however, the buttons on the remaining RKE transmitters will continue to work. Driving at speeds 5 mph (8 km/h) and above disables all RKE transmitter buttons for all RKE transmitters.

PANIC

021408059

KeyFobwithThree-ButtonRKETransmitter

ToUnlocktheDoors

Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter once to unlock the driver's door or twice to unlock all doors. The turn signal lamps will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal. The illuminated entry system will also turn on.

20 THINGSTOKNOWBEFORESTARTINGYOURVEHICLE

RemoteKeyUnlock, DriverDoor/AllDoorsFirst Press

This feature lets you program the system to unlock either the driver's door or all doors, on the first press of the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. To change the current setting, proceed as follows:

- For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.

FlashLampswithRemoteKeyLock

This feature will cause the turn signal lamps to flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be turned on or off. To change the current setting, proceed as follows:

- For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), refer to "Electronic Vehicle

Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.

TurnHeadlightsOnwithRemoteKeyUnlock

This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter. The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

ToLocktheDoors

Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter to lock all doors. The turn signal lamps will flash and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal.

THINGSTOKNOWBEFORESTARTINGYOURVEHICLE21

SoundHornwithRemoteKeyLock

This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors are locked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be turned on or off. To change the current setting, proceed as follows:

- For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.

ToReleasetheLiftgateFlipperGlass

Press the FLIPPER GLASS/LIFTGATE RELEASE button two times (the second press within five seconds of the first press) to open liftgate flipper glass.

WARNING!

Drivingwiththeflipperglassopencanallowpoisonousexhaustgasesintoyourvehicle.Youandyour passengerscouldbeinjuredbythesefumes.Keep theflipperglassclosedwhenyouareoperatingthe vehicle.

RemoteOpenWindowFeature—IfEquipped

This feature allows you to remotely lower both front door windows at the same time. To use this feature, press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter and then immediately press and hold the UNLOCK button until the windows lower to the level desired or until they lower completely.

To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, press and hold the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one second and release. When the Panic Alarm is on, the headlights and park lamps will flash, the horn will pulse on and off, and the interior lights will turn on.

The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless you turn it off by either pressing the PANIC button a second time, or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 mph (24 km/h) or greater.

NOTE: The interior lights will turn off if you turn the ignition switch to the ACC or ON position while the Panic Alarm is activated. However, the exterior lamps and horn will remain on.

ProgrammingAdditionalTransmitters

Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be performed at an authorized dealer.

TransmitterBatteryReplacement

The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032 battery.

NOTE:

• Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate

• Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back housing or the printed circuit board.

• Battery access is through a door located on the rear of the Key Fob. Insert a small, flat blade screwdriver into the slot and gently pry open the access door.

Top-down diagram of a boat hull with an arrow pointing to the side (no text or symbols)

021305151
BatteryReplacement
1— Battery Access Door

1. Remove and replace the battery. Avoid touching the new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it with rubbing alcohol.

THINGSTOKNOWBEFORESTARTINGYOURVEHICLE23

1. Reposition the access door panel over the battery opening and snap into place.

GeneralInformation

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following conditions:

• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal distance, check for these two conditions:

1. A weak battery in the RKE transmitter. The expected life of the battery is a minimum of three years.
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB radios.

REMOTESTARTINGSYSTEM—IFEQUIPPED

This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to start the engine conveniently from outside the vehicle while still maintaining security. The system has a range of nately 328 ft (100 m).

NOTE: The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.

HowtoUseRemoteStart

All of the following conditions must be met before the engine will remote start:

• Shift lever in PARK
• Doors closed
• Hood closed
• Liftgate closed
• Hazard switch off
• Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
• Ignition key removed from ignition switch
• Battery at an acceptable charge level
  • RKE PANIC button not pressed

WARNING!

• Donotstartorrunanengineinaclosedgarageor confinedarea.ExhaustgascontainsCarbonMonoxide(CO)whichisodorlessandcolorless.CarbonMonoxideispoisonousandcancauseserious injuryordeathwheninhaled.
• KeepRemoteKeylessEntry(RKE)transmitters awayfromchildren.OperationoftheRemoteStart System,windows,doorlocksorothercontrols couldcauseseriousinjuryordeath.

ToEnterRemoteStartMode

Press and release the REMOTE START button on the RKE transmitter twice, within five seconds. The parking lights will flash and the horn will chirp twice (if programmed). Then, the engine will start and the vehicle will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15 minute cycle.

THINGSTOKNOWBEFORESTARTINGYOURVEHICLE25

NOTE:

• If an engine fault is present the vehicle will start and then shut down 10 seconds later.
• The park lamps will turn on and remain on during Remote Start mode.
• For security, power window and power sunroof operation (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode.
• The engine can be started two consecutive times (two 15 minute cycles) with the RKE transmitter. However, the ignition switch must be cycled to the ON position before you can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle.

ToExitRemoteStartModeWithoutDrivingthe Vehicle

Press and release the REMOTE START button one time or allow the engine to run for the entire 15 minute cycle.

NOTE: To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system will disable the one time press of the REMOTE START button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote Start request.

ToExitRemoteStartModeandDrivetheVehicle

Before the end of 15 minute cycle, press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15 minute cycle, insert the key into the ignition switch and turn the switch to the ON position.

NOTE:

• The ignition switch must be in the ON position in order to drive the vehicle.
• For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), the message "Insert Key/ Turn To Run" will flash in the EVIC until you insert

the key. Once inserted, the message "Turn To Run" will flash in the EVIC until you turn the key to run.

DOORLOCKS

ManualDoorLocks

Use the manual door lock plunger to lock the doors from inside the vehicle. If the plunger is down when the door is closed, the door will lock. Therefore, make sure the key is not inside the vehicle before closing the door.

WARNING!

- Forpersonalsecurityandsafetyintheeventofan accident,lockthevehicledoorswhenyoudrive,as wellaswhenyouparkandleavethevehicle.

(Continued)

THINGSTOKNOWBEFORESTARTINGYOURVEHICLE27

WARNING!(Continued)

- Whenleavingthevehicle,alwaysremovethekey fromtheignitionandlockyourvehicle.Donot leaveunattendedchildreninthevehicle,orwith accesstoan unlocked vehicle.Unsuperviseduse of vehicleequipmentmaycauseseverepersonalinjuriesanddeath.

PowerDoorLocks

The power door lock switch is located on each front door panel. Press the switch to lock or unlock the doors.

Close-up of a car's left-side control panel with buttons and a black arrow pointing to the button (no text or symbols on the panel itself)

PowerDoorLockSwitch

If the plunger is down when the door is closed, the door will lock. Therefore, make sure the Key Fob is not inside the vehicle before closing the door.

If you press the door lock switch while the Key Fob is in the ignition switch and the driver's door is open, the doors will not lock.

The rear doors cannot be opened from inside the vehicle until you pull up the lock plungers.

AutomaticUnlockOnExitFeature—IfEquipped

If Auto Unlock is enabled, this feature will unlock all the doors when the driver's door is opened if the vehicle is stopped and in PARK or NEUTRAL. Refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.

AutomaticDoorLocks

If this feature is selected, your door locks will lock automatically when the vehicle speed is above 15 mph (24 km/h) and all doors are closed. It will reset whenever a door is opened.

This feature is selectable and can be turned on or off. Refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/

Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.

ChildProtectionDoorLock

The rear doors of your vehicle are equipped with Child Protection Door Locks. If you push up on the lever on the open edge of the door it cannot be opened from the inside of the vehicle. Push the lever down to disengage the Child Protection Door Locks.

WARNING!

Avoidtrappinganyoneinthevehicleinacollision. Rememberthatthereardoorscanonlybeopened fromtheoutsidewhentheChildProtectionDoor Locksareengaged.

Close-up of a fabric garment with a zipper and zipper mechanism, showing no text or symbols

ChildProtectionDoorLock

WINDOWS

PowerWindows

The power window controls are located on the driver's door trim panel. There is a single switch on the front passenger door/rear doors which operates the front

THINGSTOKNOWBEFORESTARTINGYOURVEHICLE29

passenger/rear passenger door windows. The window controls will operate only when the ignition switch is in the ON or ACCESSORY position.

Close-up of a car interior control panel with a black arrow pointing to the left side (no text or symbols visible)

PowerWindowSwitches

The power window switches remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch has been turned OFF. Opening a vehicle front door will cancel this feature.

Both the driver and front passenger window switches have an "Auto-Down" feature. Press the window switch past the first detent, release, and the window will go down automatically. To cancel the "Auto-Down" movement, operate the switch in either the up or down direction and release the switch.

To open the window part way, press to the first detent and release it when you want the window to stop.

The power window switches remain active for 10 minutes after the ignition has been turned OFF. Opening either front door will cancel this feature.

AutoUpFeaturewithAnti-PinchProtection—DriverandFrontPassengerDoorOnly

Lift the window switch to the second detent, release, and the window will go up automatically.

To stop the window from going all the way up during the Auto Up operation, push down on the switch briefly.

To close the window part way, lift the window switch to the first detent and release when you want the window to stop.

NOTE: If the window runs into any obstacle during Auto Up it will reverse direction and then go back down. Remove the obstacle and use the window switch again to close the window. Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger the auto reverse function unexpectedly during Auto Up. If this happens, pull the switch lightly to the first detent and hold it to close the window manually.

WARNING!

Thereisnoanti-pinchprotectionwhenthewindow isalmostclosed.Besuretoclearalobjectsfromthe windowbeforeclosing.

THINGSTOKNOWBEFORESTARTINGYOURVEHICLE31

ResettingtheAutoUpFeature

Should the Auto Up feature stop working, the window probably needs to be reset. To reset Auto Up:

Pull the window switch up and close the window completely, then pull and hold the switch for one second.

WindowLockoutButton

The Window Lockout button on the driver's door allows you to disable the window controls on the other doors. To disable the window controls on the other doors, press the Window Lockout button. To enable the window controls, press the Window Lockout button again.

Close-up of a car interior control panel with a black arrow pointing to the left side (no text or symbols visible)

WindowLockoutButton

Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting.

LIFTGATE

To open the liftgate, pull up (squeeze) on the handle and lift. Manually unlocking the vehicle doors with the plunger or a key in the lock cylinder will not unlock the liftgate.

Front view of a car showing the rear bumper and side grille (no text or symbols)

8167d4ce
LiftgateRelease

THINGSTOKNOWBEFORESTARTINGYOURVEHICLE33

WARNING!

• Drivingwiththeliftgateopencanallowpoison-ousexhaustgasesintoyourvehicle.Youandyour passengerscouldbeinjuredbythesefumes.Keep theliftgateclosedwhenyouareoperatingthe vehicle.
• Thetailpipesmaybehotandyoucouldbeseriouslyinjuredifyoucomeintocontactwiththem.

LiftgateFlipperGlass

The liftgate flipper glass is also unlocked when the liftgate is unlocked. To open the flipper glass, push up on the window switch located on the liftgate.

Front view of a car showing the rear bumper and side grille (no text or symbols visible)

8167d4e0

LiftgateGlassRelease

WARNING!

To avoid injurystandback when opening. Glass will automatically rise.

Once the liftgate flipper glass has been opened, connection to the rear window wiper is interrupted, preventing activation of the rear wiper blade while the flipper glass is open.

NOTE: If a malfunction to the liftgate latch should occur, an emergency liftgate latch release can be used to open the liftgate. The emergency liftgate latch release can be accessed through a snap-in cover located on the liftgate trim panel.

WARNING!

Drivingwiththeflipperglassopencanallowpoisonousexhaustgasesintoyourvehicle.Youandyour passengerscouldbeinjuredbythesefumes.Keep theflipperglassclosedwhenyouareoperatingthe vehicle.

OCCUPANTRESTRAINTS

Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems:

• Three-point lap and shoulder belts for the driver and all passengers
• Advanced Front Airbags for driver and front passenger
• Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) for the driver and passengers seated next to a window — if equipped
  • Supplemental Side Seat Airbags — if equipped
• An energy-absorbing steering column and steering wheel
• Knee bolsters/blockers for front seat occupants

THINGSTOKNOWBEFORESTARTINGYOURVEHICLE35

- Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners to enhance occupant protection by managing occupant energy during an impact event — if equipped

If you will be carrying children too small for adult-sized seat belts, the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH) feature also can be used to hold infant and child restraint systems. For more information on LATCH, see Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH).

NOTE: The Advanced Front Airbags have a multistage inflator design. This allows the airbag to have different rates of inflation based on severity and type of collision.

Please pay close attention to the information in this section. It tells you how to use your restraint system properly, to keep you and your passengers assafe as possible.

WARNING!

Inacollision, you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the vehicle. Always besure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly.

Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver and cause a collision that includes you. This can happen far away from home or on your own street.

Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of

ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should bebeltedatalltimes.

Lap/ShoulderBelts

All seating positions in your vehicle have combination lap/shoulder belts. The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during very sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under normal conditions. But in a collision, the belt will lock and reduce the risk of you striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out.

WARNING!

• Wearingaseatbeltincorrectlyisdangerous.Seat beltsaredesignedtogoaroundthelargebonesof yourbody.Thesearethestrongestpartsofyour bodyandcantaketheforcesofacollisionthebest. Wearingyourbeltinthewrongplacecouldmake yourinjuriesinacollisionmuchworse.Youmight sufferinternalinjuries,oryoucouldevenslideout ofpartofthebelt.Followtheseinstructionsto wearyourseatbeltsafelyandtokeepyourpassengerssafe,too.
• Twopeopleshouldneverbebeltedintoasingle seatbelt.Peoplebeltedtogethercancrashintoone anotherinanaccident,hurtingoneanotherbadly. Neverusealap/shoulderbeltoralapbeltformore thanoneperson,nomatterwhattheirsize.

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

• Itisextremelydangeroustorideinacargoarea, insideoroutsideofavehicle.Inacollision,people ridingintheseareasaremorelikelytobeseriouslyinjuredorkilled.
• Donotallowpeopletorideinanyareaofyour vehiclethatisnotequippedwithseatsandseat belts.
• Besureeveryoneinyourvehicleisinaseatand usingaseatbeltproperly.

Lap/ShoulderBeltOperatingInstructions

1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and adjust the seat.

THINGSTOKNOWBEFORESTARTINGYOURVEHICLE37

1. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of your seat. Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt. Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to make the belt go around your lap.

Interior view of a car showing steering wheel, dashboard, and driver's seat (no text or symbols visible)

LatchPlate

1. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a "click."

Interior view of a car showing steering wheel, dashboard, and driver's seatbelt (no text or symbols visible)

LatchPlatetoBuckle

WARNING!

• Abeltthatisbuckledintothewrongbucklewill notprotectyouproperly. Thelapportioncould ridetoohighonyourbody,possiblycausing internalinjuries. Alwaysbuckleyourbeltintothe bucklenearestyou.
• Abeltthatistooloosewillnotprotectyouaswell. Inasuddenstopyoucouldmovetoofarforward, increasingthepossibilityofinjury.Wearyourseat beltsnugly.

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

• Abeltthatiswornunderyourarmisverydangerous.Yourbodycouldstriketheinsidesurfacesof thevehicleinacollision,increasingheadandneck injury.Abeltwornunderthearmcancause internalinjuries.Ribsaren'tasstrongasshoulder bones.Wearthebeltoveryourshouldersothat yourstrongestboneswilltaketheforceina collision.
• Ashoulderbeltplacedbehindyouwillnotprotect youfrominjuryduringacollision.Youaremore likelytohityourheadinacollisionifyoudonot wearyourshoulderbelt.Thelapandshoulderbelt aremeanttobeusedtogether.

THINGSTOKNOWBEFORESTARTINGYOURVEHICLE39

1. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your abdomen. To remove slack in the lap portion, pull up a bit on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision.

WARNING!

• Alapbeltworntoohighcanincreasetheriskof injuryinacollision.Thebeltforceswon'tbeatthe stronghipandpelvicbones,butacrossyourabdomen.Alwayswearthelappartofyourseatbelt aslowaspossibleandkeepitsnug.
• Atwistedbeltcan'tdoitsjobaswell.Ina collision,itcouldevencutintoyou.Besurethe beltisstraight.Ifyoucan'tstraightenabeltin yourvehicle,takeittoyourauthorizeddealerand haveitfixed.

1. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw any slack in the belt.

Interior view of a car showing steering wheel, dashboard, and steering wheel (no visible text or symbols)

RemovingSlackfromBelt

1. To release the belt, push the red button marked PRESS on the buckle. The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow it to retract fully.

WARNING!

Afrayedortornbeltcouldripapartinacollisionand leaveyouwithnoprotection.Inspectthebeltsystem periodically,checkingforcuts,frays,orlooseparts. Damagedpartsmustbereplacedimmediately.Do notdisassembleormodifythesystem.Seatbelt assembliesmustbereplacedafteranaccidentifthey havebeendamaged(bentretractor,tornwebbing, etc.).

AdjustableUpperShoulderBeltAnchorage

In the front seating positions, the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to position the belt away from your neck. Press the release button to release the anchorage, and then move it up or down to the position that serves you best.

Interior view of a car showing steering wheel, dashboard, and driver's seatbelt (no text or symbols visible)

AdjustingUpperShoulderBelt

THINGSTOKNOWBEFORESTARTINGYOURVEHICLE41

As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will prefer a lower position, and if you are taller than average, you will prefer a higher position. When you release the anchorage, try to move it up or down to make sure that it is locked in position.

EnergyManagementFeature

This vehicle has a safety belt system with an Energy Management feature in the front seating positions to help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head-on collision.

This safety belt system has a retractor assembly that is designed to release webbing in a controlled manner. This feature is designed to help reduce the belt force acting on the occupant's chest.

• Thebeltandretractorassemblymustbereplaced iftheseatbeltassemblyAutomaticLockingRetractor(ALR)featureoranyotherseatbeltfunctionisnotworkingproperlywhencheckedaccordingtotheproceduresintheServiceManual.
• Failuretoreplacethebeltandretractorassembly couldincreaseetheriskofinjuryincollisions.

AutomaticLockingRetractors(ALR)Mode—If Equipped

In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked. The belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt. The Automatic Locking Mode is available on all passenger-seating positions with a combination lap/shoulder belt.

WhenToUseTheAutomaticLockingMode

Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child safety seat is installed in the rear outboard seating position. Children 12 years old and younger should always be properly restrained in the rear seat.

HowToUseTheAutomaticLockingMode

1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire belt is extracted.
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode.

HowtoDisengageTheAutomaticLockingMode

Disconnect the combination lap/shoulder belt from the buckle and allow it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.

SeatBeltPretensioners—IfEquipped

The seat belts for both front seating positions may be equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision. These devices improve the performance of the seat belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occupants, including those in child restraints.

NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be worn snugly and positioned properly.

The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the airbags, the pretensioners are single use items. After a collision deploys the airbags and/or pretensioners, a deployed airbag and/or pretensioner must be replaced immediately.

EnhancedSeatBeltUseReminderSystem (BeltAlert®)

If the driver's seat belt has not been buckled within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle and if the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), the BeltAlert® will alert the driver to buckle the seat belt. The driver should also instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts. Once the warning is triggered, the BeltAlert® will continue to chime and flash the Seat Belt Reminder Light for 96 seconds or until the driver's seat belt is buckled. The BeltAlert® will be reactivated if the driver's seat belt is unbuckled for more than 10 seconds and the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h).

BeltAlert ^® can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer or by following these steps:

NOTE: The following steps must occur within the first 60 seconds of the ignition switch being turned to the ON or START position. Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend deactivating BeltAlert®.

44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

1. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position, and buckle the driver's seat belt.
2. Turn the ignition key to the ACC/ON position (do not start the engine), and wait for the Seat Belt Reminder Light to turn off.
3. Within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle, unbuckle and then re-buckle the driver's seat belt at least three times within 10 seconds, ending with the seat belt buckled.
4. Turn the ignition key to the OFF position. A single chime will sound to signify that you have successfully completed the programming.

BeltAlert ^® can be reactivated by repeating this procedure.

NOTE: Although BeltAlert® has been deactivated, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate while the driver's seat belt remains unfastened.

SeatBeltsandPregnantWomen

We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is the best way to keep the baby safe.

Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible. Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take the force if there is a collision.

SeatBeltExtender

If a seat belt is too short, even when fully extended and when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its lowest position, your authorized dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender. This extender should be used only if the existing belt is not long enough. When it is not required, remove the extender and store it.

WARNING!

Usingaseatbeltextenderwhennotneededcan increasetheriskofinjuryinacollision.Onlyuse whenthelapbeltisnotlongenoughwhenitisworn lowandsnug,andintherecommendedseating positions.Removeandstoretheextenderwhennot needed.

SupplementalRestraintSystems(SRS)—Airbags

This vehicle has airbags for both the driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems. The driver's front airbag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The passenger's front airbag is mounted in the instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the airbag covers.

THINGSTOKNOWBEFORESTARTINGYOURVEHICLE45

Diagram of a car dashboard with labeled parts including steering wheel, dashboard, and air vent

1 — Driver Airbag
2 — Passenger Airbag
3 — Knee Bolster

NOTE: These airbags are certified to the new Federal regulations for Advanced Airbags.

The Advanced Front Airbags have a multistage inflator design. This allows the airbag to have different rates of inflation based on the severity and type of collision.

This vehicle may also be equipped with Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) to protect the driver, front, and rear passengers sitting next to a window. If the vehicle is equipped with SABIC airbags, they are located above the side windows and their covers are also labeled: SRS AIRBAG.

NOTE: Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim; but they will open during airbag deployment.

AirbagSystemComponents

The airbag system consists of the following:

• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)

• Airbag Warning Light
• Driver Front Airbag
• Front Passenger Airbag
  • Front and Side Impact Sensors
  • Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Knee Impact Bolster
• Front Seat Belt Pretensioners — if equipped
• Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) — if equipped

AdvancedFrontAirbagFeatures

The Advanced Front Airbag system has multistage driver and front passenger airbags. This system provides output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), which may receive information from the impact sensors at the front of the car.

The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an impact that requires airbag deployment. The timing of the second stage determines whether the output force is low, medium, or high. If a low output is sufficient to meet the need, the remaining gas in the inflator is expended.

WARNING!

• Noobjectsshouldbeplacedoverornearthe airbagontheinstrumentpanel, becauseanysuch objectscouldcauseharmifthevehicleisinacrash severeenoughtocausetheairbagtoinflate.
• Donotputanythingonoraroundtheairbag coversorattempttoopenthemmanually.Youmay damagetheairbagsandyoucouldbeinjured because the airbags may no longer be functional. The protective covers for the air bag cushions are designed to open only when the air bags are in floating.
• Donotdrill, cutortamperwiththekneebolsterin anyway.
• Donotmountanyaccessoriestothekneebolster suchasalarmlights, stereos, citizenbandradios, etc.

SABIC airbags offer side-impact and vehicle rollover protection to front and rear seat outboard occupants in addition to that provided by the body structure. Each airbag features inflated chambers placed adjacent to the head of each outboard occupant that reduce the potential for side-impact head injuries. The curtains deploy downward, covering both windows on the impact side.

Close-up of a car seatbelt buckle with a logo on the side (no text or symbols visible)

SupplementalSideAirbagInflatableCurtain(SABIC) Location

THINGSTOKNOWBEFORESTARTINGYOURVEHICLE49

NOTE:

• Should a vehicle rollover occur, the pretensioners and/or SABIC airbags on both sides of the vehicle may deploy.
• Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim; but they will open during airbag deployment.

The system includes sensors adjacent to both front and rear seat occupants that are calibrated to deploy the SABIC airbags during impacts that require airbag occupant protection.

WARNING!

• If your vehicle is equipped with left and right side Airbag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC), donot stack luggage or other cargoughenoughtoblock the location of the SABIC. The areawheretheside curtain air bag is located should remain free from any obstructions.
• Donotuseaccessoryseatcoversorplaceobjects betweenyouandthesideairbags;theperformance couldbeadverselyaffectedand/orobjectscould bepushedintoyou,causingseriousinjury.

KneeImpactBolsters

The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the driver and the front passenger, and position everyone for the best interaction with the Advanced Front Airbag.

Along with seat belts and pretensioners, Advanced Front Airbags work with the knee bolsters to provide improved protection for the driver and front passenger. Side airbags also work with seat belts to improve occupant protection.

Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying airbag:

Children 12 years old and younger should always ride buckled up in a rear seat.

WARNING!

Infantsinrear-facingchildrestraintsshouldNEVER rideinthefrontseatofvehiclewithapassenger frontairbag.Anairbagdeploymentcancausesevere injuryordeathtoinfantsinthatposition.

Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat belt properly (see Section on Child Restraints) should be

secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats. Older children who do not use child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled up in the rear seat. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm.

If a child from 1 to 12 years old (not in a rear facing child seat) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the seat as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint. (Refer to "Child Restraints")

You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.

All occupants should ALWAYS wear their lap and shoulder belts properly.

The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front Airbags room to inflate.

THINGSTOKNOWBEFORESTARTINGYOURVEHICLE51

Do not lean against the door. If your vehicle has side airbags, and deployment occurs, the side airbags will inflate forcefully into the space between you and the door.

If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided under "If You Need Assistance".

WARNING!

- Relyingontheairbagsalonecouldleadtomore severeinjuriesinacollision.Theairbagswork withyourseatbelttorestrainyouproperly.In somecollisions,theairbagswon'tdeployatall. Alwayswearyourseatbeltseventhoughyouhave airbags.

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

• Beingtooclosetothesteeringwheelorinstrument panelduringfrontairbagdeploymentcouldcause seriousinjury,includingdeath.Airbagsneed roomtoinflate.Sitback,comfortablyextending yourarmstoreachthesteeringwheelorinstrumentpanel.
• Sideairbagsalsoneedroomtoinflate.Donotlean againstthedoor.Situprightinthecenterofthe seat.

AirbagDeploymentSensorsandControls

OccupantRestraintController(ORC)

The ORCis part of a Federally regulated safety system required for this vehicle.

The ORC determines if deployment of the front and/or side airbags in a frontal or side collision is required. Based on the impact sensors signals, a central electronic

ORC deploys the Advanced Front Airbags, SABIC airbags — if equipped, and front seat belt pretensioners — if equipped, as required, depending on severity and type of impact.

Advanced Front Airbags are designed to provide additional protection by supplementing the seat belts in certain frontal collisions depending on the severity and type of collision. Advanced Front Airbags are not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions.

The Advanced Front Airbags will not deploy in all frontal collisions, including some that may produce substantial vehicle damage — for example, some pole collisions, truck underrides, and angle offset collisions. On the other hand, depending on the type and location of impact, Advanced Front Airbags may deploy in crashes with little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe initial deceleration.

The side airbags will not deploy in all side collisions. Side airbag deployment will depend on the severity and type of collision.

Because airbag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not good indicators of whether or not an airbag should have deployed.

Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all collisions, and also are needed to help keep you in position, away from an inflating airbag.

The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the system whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON position. If the key is in the LOCK position, in the ACC position, or not in the ignition, the airbags are not on and will not inflate.

The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may deploy the airbags even if the battery loses power or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.

Also, the ORC turns on the Airbag Warning Light in the instrument panel for approximately six to eight seconds for a self-check when the ignition is first turned on. After the self-check, the Airbag Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it turns on the Airbag Warning Light, either momentarily or continuously. A single chime will sound if the light comes on again after initial startup.

It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instrument cluster Airbag Warning Light if a malfunction is noted. The diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction.

WARNING!

IgnoringtheAirbagWarningLightinyourinstrumentpanelcouldmeanyouwon'thavetheairbagsto protectyouinacollision.Ifthelightdoesnotcome on,staysonafteryoustartthevehicle,orifitcomes onasyoudrive,havetheairbagsystemcheckedright away.

DriverandPassengerAirbagInflatorUnits

The Driver and Passenger Airbag/Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering wheel and the right side of the instrument panel. When the ORC detects a collision requiring the airbags, it signals the inflator units. A large quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the Advanced Front Airbags. Different airbag inflation rates are possible, based on the collision type and severity. The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel separate and fold out

of the way as the bags inflate to their full size. The bags fully inflate in about 50 to 70 milliseconds. This is about half of the time it takes to blink your eyes. The bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.

The driver front airbag gas is vented through the vent holes in the sides of the airbag. The passenger front airbag gas is vented through the vent holes in the sides of the airbag. In this way, the airbags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle.

SupplementalSideAirbagInflatableCurtain (SABIC)InflatorUnits—IfEquipped

During collisions where the impact is confined to a particular area of the side of the vehicle, the ORC may deploy the SABIC airbags, depending on severity and type of collision. In these events, the ORC will deploy the SABIC only on the impact side of the vehicle.

A quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the side curtain airbag. The inflating side curtain airbag pushes the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and covers the window. The airbag inflates in about 30 ms (about one-quarter of the time that it takes to blink your eyes) with enough force to injure you if you are not belted and seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area where the side curtain airbag inflates. This especially applies to children. The side curtain airbag is only about 3-1/2 in (9 cm) thick when it is inflated.

Because airbag sensors estimate deceleration over time, vehicle speed and damage are not good indicators of whether or not an airbag should have deployed.

NOTE: In a rollover the pretensioners and/or SABIC airbags may deploy on both sides of the vehicle.

FrontandSideImpactSensors

In front and side impacts, impact sensors aid the ORC in determining appropriate response to impact events. Additional sensors in the ORC determine the level of airbag deployment and provide verification.

EnhancedAccidentResponseSystem

In the event of an impact causing airbag deployment, if the communication network remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending on the nature of the event the ORC will determine whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform the following functions:

• Cut off fuel to the engine.
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or until the ignition key is turned off.
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as the battery has power or until the ignition key is removed.

THINGSTOKNOWBEFORESTARTINGYOURVEHICLE55

- Unlock the doors automatically.

IfaDeploymentOccurs

The front airbags are designed to deflate immediately after deployment.

NOTE: Front and/or side airbags will not deploy in all collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with the airbag system.

If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags, any or all of the following may occur:

• The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abrasions and/or skin reddening to the driver and front passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals. They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.

However, if you haven't healed significantly within a few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor immediately.

- As the airbags deflate, you may see some smoke-like particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the process that generates the non-toxic gas used for airbag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer's instructions for cleaning.

Do not drive your vehicle after the airbags have deployed. If you are involved in another collision, the airbags will not be in place to protect you.

WARNING!

Deployedairbagsandseatbeltpretensionerscannot protectyouinanothercollision.Havetheairbags, seatbeltpretensioners,andthefrontpassengerseat beltretractorassemblyreplacedbyanaauthorized dealerassoonaspossible.Also,havetheOccupant RestraintController(ORC)systemservicedaswell.

MaintainingYourAirbagSystem

WARNING!

• Modificationstoanypartoftheairbagsystem couldcauseittofailwhenyouneedit.Youcould beinjurediftheairbagsystemisnotthereto protectyou.Donotmodifythecomponentsor wiring,includingaddinganykindofbadgesor stickerstothesteeringwheelhubtrimcoverorthe upperrightsideoftheinstrumentpanel.Donot modifythefrontbumper,vehiclebodystructure, oraddaftermarketsidestepsorrunningboards.
• Itisdangeroustotrytorepairanypartofthe airbagsystemyourself.Besuretotellanyonewho worksonyourvehiclethatithasanairbagsystem.

THINGSTOKNOWBEFORESTARTINGYOURVEHICLE57

WARNING!(Continued)

• Donotattempttomodifyanypartofyouradvancedairbagsystem.Theairbagmayinflate accidentallyormaynotfunctionproperlyifmodificationsaremade.Takeyourvehicletoanauthorizeddealerforanyadvancedairbagsystemservice.Ifyourseat,includingyourtrimcoverand cushion,needstobeservicedinanyway(includingremovalorloosening/tighteningofseatattachmentbolts),takethevehicletoyourauthorized dealer.Onlymanufacturerapprovedseataccessoriesmaybeused.Ifitisnecessarytomodifyan advancedairbagsystemforpersonswithdisabilities,contactyourauthorizeddealer.

(Continued)

58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

AirbagWarningLight

You will want to have the airbags ready to inflate for your protection in a collision. While the airbag system is designed to be maintenance free, if any of the following occurs, have an authorized dealer service the system immediately.

• The Airbag Warning Light does not come on for approximately six to eight seconds when the ignition switch is first turned ON.
• The light remains on after the approximate six to eight-second interval.
• The light comes on and remains on while driving.

NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. The airbags may not be ready to inflate for your protection. Promptly check the fuse block for blown fuses. Refer to the label located on the inside of the fuse block cover for the proper airbag fuses. See your authorized dealer if the fuse is good.

EventDataRecorder(EDR)

In the event of an accident, your vehicle is designed to record up to five seconds of specific vehicle data parameters (see list below) in an event data recorder prior to the moment of airbag deployment, or near deployment (if applicable), and up to a quarter second of either high-speed deceleration data or change in velocity during and/or after airbag deployment or near-deployment. EDR data is ONLY recorded if an airbag deploys, or nearly deploys, and is otherwise unavailable.

NOTE:

1. A near-deployment event occurs when the airbag sensor detects severe vehicle deceleration usually indicative of a crash, but not severe enough to warrant airbag deployment.

2. Under certain circumstances, EDR data may not be recorded (e.g., loss of battery power).

In conjunction with other data gathered during a complete accident investigation, the electronic data may be used by Chrysler Group LLC and others to learn more about the possible causes of crashes and associated injuries in order to assess and improve vehicle performance. In addition to crash investigations initiated by Chrysler Group LLC, such investigations may be requested by customers, insurance carriers, government officials, and professional crash researchers, such as those associated with universities, and with hospital and insurance organizations.

In the event that an investigation is undertaken by Chrysler Group LLC (regardless of initiative), the company or its designated representative will first obtain permission of the appropriate custodial entity for the vehicle (usually the vehicle owner or lessee) before

THINGSTOKNOWBEFORESTARTINGYOURVEHICLE

accessing the electronic data stored, unless ordered to download data by a court with legal jurisdiction (i.e., pursuant to a warrant). A copy of the data will be provided to the custodial entity upon request. General data that does not identify particular vehicles or crashes may be released for incorporation in aggregate crash databases, such as those maintained by the U.S. government and various states. Data of a potentially sensitive nature, such as would identify a particular driver, vehicle, or crash, will be treated confidentially. Confidential data will not be disclosed by Chrysler Group LLC to any third party except when:

1. Used for research purposes, such as to match data with a particular crash record in an aggregate database, provided confidentiality of personal data is thereafter preserved.
2. Used in defense of litigation involving a Chrysler Group LLC product.

1. Requested by police under a legal warrant.
2. Otherwise required by law.

Data parameters that are recorded:

• Diagnostic trouble code(s) and warning light status for electronically-controlled safety systems, including the airbag system
• Vehicle speed
• Engine RPM
• Brake switch status
• Pedal position
• And other parameters depending on vehicle configuration

ChildRestraints

Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the time, including babies and children. Every state in the United States, and all Canadian provinces, require that small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.

Children 12 years and under should ride properly buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front.

There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child seat Owner's Manual to ensure you have the right seat for your child. Use the restraint that is correct for your child.

WARNING!

Inacollision, an unrestrained child, even atiny baby, can become a projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to hold even an infant on your lap can becomes so great that you could not hold the child, no matter how strongly you are. The child and others could be badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicles should be in proper restraint for the child's size.

InfantsandChildRestraints

- Safety experts recommend that children ride rearward-facing in the vehicle until they are at least one year old and weigh at least 20 lbs (9 kg). Two types of child restraints can be used rearward-facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats.

THINGSTOKNOWBEFORESTARTINGYOURVEHICLE 61

- The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the vehicle. It is recommended for children who weigh up to about 20 lbs (9 kg). Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearward-facing direction than infant carriers do, so they can be used rearward-facing by children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) but are less than one year old. Both types of child restraints are held in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system (Refer to LATCH — Child Seat Anchorage System.)

WARNING!

- Rearward-facingchildseatsmustNEVERbeused inthefrontseatofvehiclewiththefrontpassengerairbagunlesstheairbagisturnedoff.An airbagdeploymentcouldcausesevereinjuryor deathtoinfantsinthisposition.

(Continued)

62THINGSTOKNOWBEFORESTARTINGYOURVEHICLE

WARNING!(Continued)

• Improperinstallationcanleadtofailureofan infantorchildrestraint.Itcouldcomelooseina collision.Thechildcouldbebadlyinjuredor killed.Followthemanufacturer'sdirectionsexactlywheninstallinganinfantorchildrestraint.
• Arearward-facinginfantrestraintshouldonlybe usedinarearseat.Arearward-facinginfantrestraintinthefrontseatmaybestruckbyadeployingpassengerairbagwhichmaycausesevereor fatalinjurytotheinfant.

Here are some tips for getting the most out of your child restraint:

- Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety

Standards. Chrysler Group LLC also recommends that you try a child restraint in the vehicle seats where you will use it before you buy it.

• The restraint must be appropriate for your child's weight and height. Check the label on the restraint for weight and height limits.
• Carefully follow the instructions that come with the restraint. If you install the restraint improperly, it may not work when you need it.
• Except for the second row center seating position, all passenger seat belts are equipped with cinching latch plates. The second row center position has an automatic locking retractor. Both types of seat belts are designed to keep the lap portion tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip. If the seat belt has a cinching latch plate, pulling up on the shoulder portion of the lap/shoulder belt will tighten the belt (the cinching latch plate will keep the

belt tight; however, any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if necessary). For the second row center seat belt with the automatic locking retractor, pull the belt from the retractor until there is enough allowance to pass it through the child restraint and slide the latch plate into the buckle. Then, pull the belt until it is fully extended from the retractor. Allow the belt to return into the retractor, pulling on the excess webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child restraint. For additional information, refer to "Automatic Locking Mode".

- In the rear seat, you may have trouble tightening the lap/shoulder belt on the child restraint because the buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path opening on the restraint. Disconnect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short buckle-end belt several times to shorten it. Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the release button facing out.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

• If the belt still cannot be tightened, or if pulling and pushing on the restraint loosens the belt, disconnect the latch plate from the buckle, turn the buckle around, and insert the latch plate into the buckle again. If you still cannot make the child restraint secure, try a different seating position.
• Buckle the child into the restraint exactly as the manufacturer's instructions tell you.
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or collision, it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious personal injury.

NOTE: For additional information, refer to www.seatcheck.org or call 1-866-SEATCHECK. Canadian residents, should refer to Transport Canada's website for additional information. http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/safedrivers/childsafety/index.htm

OlderChildrenandChildRestraints

Children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg), and who are older than one year, can ride forward-facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children who weigh 20 to 40 lbs (9 to 18 kg), and who are older than one year. These child seats are also held in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system (Refer to LATCH — Child Seat Anchorage System.)

The belt-positioning booster seat is for children weighing more than 40 lbs (18 kg), but who are still too small to fit the vehicle's seat belts properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle's seat cushion while the child's back is against the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt.

ChildrenTooLargeforBoosterSeats

Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback, should use the lap/shoulder belt in a rear seat.

• Make sure that the child is upright in the seat.
- The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug as possible.
- Check belt fit periodically. A child's squirming or slouching can move the belt out of position.
- If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the child closer to the center of the vehicle. Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind the back.

LATCH—ChildSeatAnchorageSystem(Lower AnchorsandTetherforChildren)

Your vehicle's rear seat is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH. The LATCH system provides for the installation of the child restraint without using the vehicle's seat belts, instead securing the child restraint using lower anchorages and upper tether straps from the child restraint to the vehicle structure.

LATCH-compatible child restraint systems are now available. However, because the lower anchorages are to be introduced over a period of years, child restraint systems having attachments for those anchorages will continue to also have features for installation using the vehicle's seat belts. Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for connection to the top tether anchorages, have been available for some time. For some older child restraints, many child restraint manufacturers offer add-on tether

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

strap kits or retro-fit kits. You are urged to take advantage of all the available attachments provided with your child restraint in any vehicle.

NOTE: When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint, please ensure that all seat belts not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out of reach of children. Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and should not be played with, and never leave your child unattended in the vehicle.

All three rear seating positions have lower anchorages that are capable of accommodating LATCH-compatible child seats having flexible, webbing-mounted lower attachments. Child seats with fixed lower attachments must be installed in the outboard positions only. Regardless of the specific type of lower attachment, NEVER install LATCH-compatible child seats such that two seats share a common lower anchorage.

If you are installing LATCH-compatible child restraints in adjacent rear seating positions, you can use the LATCH anchors or the vehicle's seat belt for the outboard position, but you must use the vehicle's seat belt at the center position. If your child restraints are not LATCH-compatible, you can only install the child restraints using the vehicle's seat belts. For typical installation instructions, refer to "Installing the LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint System".

InstallingtheLATCH-CompatibleChildRestraint System

We urge you to carefully follow the directions of the manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not all child restraint systems will be installed as described here. Again, carefully follow the installation instructions that were provided with the child restraint system.

The rear seat lower anchorages are round bars, located at the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback, and are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the intersection of the seatback and seat cushion surfaces.

Close-up of a car interior showing seatbelt and dashboard (no visible text or symbols)

LatchAnchorage

In addition, there are tether strap anchorages behind each rear seating position located on the back of the seat.

Interior view of a vehicle showing seat, rear panel, and cable (no visible text or symbols)

TetherStrapMounting

Many, but not all restraint systems will be equipped with separate straps on each side, with each having a hook or connector for attachment to the lower anchorage and a

THINGSTOKNOWBEFORESTARTINGYOURVEHICLE67

means of adjusting the tension in the strap. Forward-facing toddler restraints and some rear-facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap, a hook for attachment to the tether strap anchorage and a means of adjusting the tension of the strap.

First, loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the tether strap so that you can more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages. Next, attach the lower hooks or connectors over the top of the anchorage bars, pushing aside the seat cover material. Then, locate the tether anchorage directly behind the seat where you are placing the child restraint and attach the tether strap to the anchorage, being careful to route the tether strap to provide the most direct path between the anchor and the child restraint. Finally, tighten all three straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat, removing slack in the straps according to the child restraint manufacturer's instructions.

WARNING!

Improperinstallationofachildrestrainttothe LATCHanchoragescanleadtofailureofaninfantor childrestraint.Thechildcouldbebadlyinjuredor killed.Followthemanufacturer'sdirectionsexactly wheninstallinganinfantorchildrestraint.

InstallingChildRestraintsUsingtheVehicleSeat Belts

The passenger seat belts are equipped with either cinching latch plates or automatic locking retractors, which are designed to keep the lap portion tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip. If the seat belt has a cinching latch plate, pulling up on the shoulder portion of the lap/shoulder belt will tighten the belt. The cinching latch plate will keep the belt tight; however, any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if necessary.

For seat belts having an Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR), pull the belt from the retractor until there is enough allowance to pass it through the child restraint and slide the latch plate into the buckle. Then, pull the belt until it is fully extended from the retractor. Allow the belt to return into the retractor, pulling on the excess webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child restraint. Refer to “Automatic Locking Mode”.

In the rear seat, you may have trouble tightening the lap/shoulder belt on the child restraint because the buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path opening on the restraint. Disconnect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short buckle-end belt several times to shorten it. Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the release button facing out.

If the belt still can't be tightened, or if pulling and pushing on the restraint loosens the belt, you may need to do something more. Disconnect the latch plate from the buckle, turn the buckle around, and insert the latch

plate into the buckle again. If you still can't make the child restraint secure, try a different seating position.

To attach a child restraint tether strap:

Route the tether strap over the seatback and attach the hook to the tether anchor located on the back of the seat. For the outboard seating positions, route the tether over the head rests, and attach the hook to the tether anchor located on the back of the seat.

WARNING!

Alwaysremovethesubwooferfromthevehicle wheneverthetetheranchorsbehindthesubwoofer arerequiredforproperinstallationofachildrestrainingdevice.Intheeventofanaccident,orunder severevehiclemaneuvers,leavingthesubwoofer unsecuredinthevehiclecouldresultinseriousor fatalinjurytoanyoneinthevehicle.

Interior view of a vehicle showing seat, dashboard, and rear panel (no visible text or symbols)

TetherStrapMounting

Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet. An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a collision. Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.

ENGINEBREAK-INRECOMMENDATIONS

A long break-in period is not required for the engine and drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.

Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km). After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.

While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws, contributes to a good break-in. Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detrimental and should be avoided.

The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For the recommended viscosity and quality grades refer to "Maintenance Procedures" in "Maintaining Your Vehicle". NON-DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS MUST NEVER BE USED.

A new engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should be considered a normal part of the break-in and not interpreted as an indication of difficulty.

SAFETYTIPS

TransportingPassengers

NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO AREA.

WARNING!

- Itisextremelydangeroustorideinacargoarea, insideoroutsideofavehicle.Inacollision,people ridingintheseareasaremorelikelytobeseriouslyinjuredorkilled.

(Continued)

• Donotallowpeopletorideinanyareaofyour vehiclethatisnotequippedwithseatsandseat belts.
• Besureeveryoneinyourvehicleisinaseatand usingaseatbeltproperly.

ExhaustGas

WARNING!

Exhaustgasescaninjureorkill. They contain carbon monoxide(CO), which is colorless and odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing(CO) follow the safety tips:

Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or out of the area.

If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running, adjust your heating or cooling controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed.

If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate open, make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode.

The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system.

Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is

damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.

SafetyChecksYouShouldMakeInsidethe Vehicle

SeatBelts

Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.

Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding belt or retractor condition, replace the belt.

AirbagWarningLight

The light should come on and remain on for six to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON. If the light is not lit during starting, see your authorized dealer. If the light stays on, flickers, or comes on while driving, have the system checked by an authorized dealer.

Defroster

Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the blower control on high speed. You should be able to feel the air directed against the windshield. See your authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable.

PeriodicSafetyChecksYouShouldMakeOutside the Vehicle

Tires

Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects

THINGSTOKNOWBEFORESTARTINGYOURVEHICLE73

lodged in the tread. Inspect the tread and sidewall for cuts and cracks. Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires (including spare) for proper pressure.

Lights

Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel.

DoorLatches

Check for positive closing, latching, and locking.

FluidLeaks

Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel, engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid, or brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should be located and corrected immediately.

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

CONTENTS

■Mirrors 80

□Automatic Dimming Mirror 80

□Outside Mirrors.... 8 1

□Outside Mirrors Folding Feature....81

□Driver's Automatic Dimming Mirrors — If Equipped 81

□Power Outside Mirrors....82

□Heated Mirrors — If Equipped ..... 8 2

□Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped . . . 83

■Uconnect™ phone — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 8 3

■ Voice Command — If Equipped ..... 83

■Seats 83

□Front Manual Seat Adjustment....84

□ Front Seat Adjustment — Recline ..... 84

□Manual Lumbar Support Adjustment....85

□ Eight-Way Driver's Power Seat .... 85

□Four-Way Passenger's Power Seat — If Equipped 86

76 UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

□Head Restraints 87
□Front Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 8 8
□Rear Heated Seats — If Equipped ..... 9 0
□60/40 Split Rear Seat 91

■Driver Memory Seat — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 9 4

☐Setting Memory Positions And Linking Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter To Memory 95

□Memory Position Recall....96

□To Disable a RKE Transmitter Linked To Memory 96

□Easy Entry/Exit Seat 97

■To Open And Close The Hood ..... 9 8

■Lights.... 100

□Multifunction Lever.... 100
□Headlights And Parking Lights....100
□Automatic Headlights — If Equipped ..... 1 0 1
□ Headlights On Automatically With Wipers .. 101
□Smartbeam™ — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 1 0 2
□ Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped .... 103
□Automatic Headlight Leveling — HID Headlights Only 103
□Instrument Panel Dimmer....103
□ Battery Saver Feature 104
□Lights-On Reminder 104
□Fog Lights — If Equipped 105
□Turn Signals.... 106

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE 77

□Lane Change Assist.... 106

□High/Low Beam Switch.... 106

□Flash-To-Pass.... 106

□Headlight Time Delay 107

□Interior Lights....107

□Front Map/Reading Lights....108

■Windshield Wipers And Washers.... 109

□Windshield Wiper Operation.... 109

□Intermittent Wiper System....110

□Windshield Washer Operation 111

□ Mist 111

□Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped ..... 1 1 2

■Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column....113

■Adjustable Pedals — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 1 1 4

Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped . . . . . 1 1 6

□To Activate.... 1 1 6

□ To Set a Desired Speed 117

□To Deactivate 117

□To Resume Speed 117

□ To Vary The Speed Setting 117

□To Accelerate For Passing.... 1 1 8

■ Parksense® Rear Park Assist — If Equipped . . . 119

□ Parksense® Sensors 119

□ Parksense® Warning Display 120

□ Enable/Disable Parksense® 121

□ Service Parksense ^® 122

78UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

□Cleaning Parksense®. 122
□System Usage Precautions....122

■Parkview®Rear Back Up Camera — If Equipped.... 1 2 5

□Turning Parkview®On Or Off — With Navigation/Multimedia Radio . . . . . . . . . 1 2 6
□Turning Parkview®On Or Off — Without Navigation/Multimedia Radio . . . . . . . . . 1 2 7

■Overhead Console 127

□Courtesy/Reading Lights....127
□Sunglasses Storage.... 1 2 8

■Garage Door Opener — If Equipped ..... 1 2 8

□Programming HomeLink®....129
□Gate Operator/Canadian Programming....132

□Using HomeLink®. 133
□Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button.... 1 3 3
□Security 133
□Troubleshooting Tips....133
□General Information.... 1 3 4

■Power Sunroof — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 1 3 5

□ Opening Sunroof — Express 136
□ Closing Sunroof — Express 136
□ Pinch Protect Feature 136
□Pinch Protect Override....136
□ Venting Sunroof — Express ..... 136
□Sunshade Operation.... 136

□Wind Buffeting.... 137

□Sunroof Maintenance....137

□Ignition Off Operation....137

□Sunroof Fully Closed 137

Electrical Power Outlets 137

■Power Inverter — If Equipped ..... 1 4 0

■Cupholders.... 1 4 3

■Cargo Area Features.... 1 4 3

□Cargo Light.... 143

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE79

□Rear Storage Compartment.... 1 4 4

□Retractable Cargo Area Cover — If Equipped.... 1 4 4

□Cargo Tie-Down Hooks 146

□Cargo Load Floor 147

■Rear Window Features.... 1 4 8

□Rear Window Wiper/Washer 148

□Rear Window Defroster.... 149

80UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

MIRRORS

AutomaticDimmingMirror

This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature on or off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror. A light next to the button will illuminate to indicate when the dimming feature is activated.

Front view of a car rear mirror with a black arrow pointing upward (no text or symbols)

030406002

AutomaticDimmingMirror

CAUTION!

Toavoiddamagetothemirrorduringcleaning,never sprayanycleaningsolutiondirectlyontothemirror. Applythesolutionontoacleanclothandwipethe mirrorclean.

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE81

OutsideMirrors

To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirrors to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror.

WARNING!

Vehiclesandotherobjectsseeninthepassenger-side convexmirrorwilllooksmallerandfartheraway thantheyreallyare.Relyingtoomuchonyour passenger-sidemirrorcouldcauseyoutocollidewith anothervehicleorotherobjects.Useyourinside mirrorwhenjudgingthesizeordistanceofvehicle seeninthepassenger-sidemirror.

OutsideMirrorsFoldingFeature

All outside mirrors are hinged and may be moved either forward or rearward to resist damage. The hinges have three detent positions; full forward, full rearward and normal.

Driver's Automatic Dimming Mirrors—If Equipped

The driver and passenger outside mirrors will automatically adjust for glare from vehicles behind you. This feature is controlled by the inside automatic dimming mirror and can be turned on or off by pressing the button at the base of the inside mirror. The mirrors will automatically adjust for headlight glare when the inside mirror adjusts.

82UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

PowerOutsideMirrors

The power mirror switch is located on the driver's door trim panel next to the power door lock switch. A rotary knob selects the left mirror, right mirror or off position.

After selecting a mirror, move the knob in the same direction you want the mirror to move. Use the off (center) position to guard against accidentally moving a mirror position.

Close-up of a camera control knob with directional arrows and function buttons (no readable text or symbols)

PowerMirrorSwitch

HeatedMirrors—IfEquipped

These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This feature is activated whenever you turn on the rear window defroster. Refer to "Rear Window Features" in "Understanding the Features of Your Vehicle" for further information.

IlluminatedVanityMirrors—IfEquipped

To access an illuminated vanity mirror, flip down one of the sun visors.

Lift the cover to reveal the mirror. The light will turn on automatically.

Close-up of a car interior panel with a double-headed arrow indicating a measurement or adjustment (no text or symbols visible)

LightedVanityMirror

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE83

Uconnect™Phone—IFEQUIPPED

Refer to "Uconnect™ Phone" in the Uconnect™ User Manual located on the DVD for further details.

VOICECOMMAND—IFEQUIPPED

Refer to "Voice Command" in the Uconnect™ Phone User Manual located on the DVD for further details.

SEATS

Seats are a primary part of the Occupant Restraint System of the vehicle. They need to be used properly for safe operation of the vehicle.

WARNING!

- DONOTallowpeopletorideinanyareaofyour vehiclethatisnotequippedwithseatsandseat belts.Inacollision,peopleridingintheseareas aremorelikelytobeseriouslyinjuredorkilled.

(Continued)

84UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

WARNING!(Continued)

- Besureeveryoneinyourvehicleisinaseatand usingaseatbeltproperly.

FrontManualSeatAdjustment

Move the seat forward or rearward using the adjustment bar. Lift up on the bar located on the front of the seat near the floor. Using body pressure, move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure the seat adjusters have latched.

WARNING!

Adjustingaseatwhilethevehicleismovingis dangerous. Thesuddenmovementoftheseatcould causeyoutolosecontrol. Theseatbeltmightnotbe properlyadjusted, andyoucouldbeinjured. Adjust anyseatonlywhilethevehicleisparked.

FrontSeatAdjustment—Recline

To adjust the seatback, lift the lever located on the outboard side of the seat, lean back and release the lever at the desired position. To return the seatback, lift the lever, lean forward and release the lever.

WARNING!

Donotridewiththeseatbackreclinedsothattheseat beltisnolongerrestingagainstyourchest.Ina collision,youcouldslideundertheseatbeltandbe seriouslyorevenfatallyinjured.Usetherecliner onlywhenthevehicleisparked.

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE85

ManualLumbarSupportAdjustment

The manual lumbar support adjustment lever is located on the right side of the driver's seatback (all models) and on the left side of the passenger's seatback (if equipped). Moving the lumbar control lever forward and rearward will increase or decrease the lumbar support.

Interior view of a car dashboard with air vent and fan (no visible text or symbols)

ManualLumbarControlPowerSeatSwitches

Eight-WayDriver'sPowerSeat

The driver's power seat switches are located on the outboard side of the driver's seat. The bottom switch controls up/down, forward/rearward and tilt adjustment. The top switch controls the seatback recline adjustment.

Interior view of a car seatbelt with a black arrow pointing to the grip area (no text or symbols visible)

86UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

WARNING!

Adjustingaseatwhilethevehicleismovingis dangerous. Thesuddenmovementoftheseatcould causeyoutolosecontrol. Theseatbeltmightnotbe properlyadjustedandyoucouldbeinjured. Adjust anyseatonlywhilethevehicleisparked.

CAUTION!

DONOTplaceanyarticleunderapowerseator impedeitsabilitytomoveasitmaycausedamageto theseatcontrols.Seattravelmaybecomelimitedif movementisstoppedbyanobstructionintheseat's path.

Four-WayPassenger'sPowerSeat—IfEquipped

The front passenger's power seat switches are located on the outboard side of the passenger's seat. The bottom switch controls forward/rearward adjustment. The top switch controls the seatback recline adjustment.

NOTE: The four-way seat does not have an up/down adjustment.

WARNING!

Adjustingaseatwhilethevehicleismovingis dangerous. Thesuddenmovementoftheseatcould causeyoutolosecontrol. Theseatbeltmightnotbe properlyadjustedandyoucouldbeinjured. Adjust anyseatonlywhilethevehicleisparked.

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE87

CAUTION!

DONOTplaceanyarticleunderapowerseator impedeitsabilitytomoveasitmaycausedamageto theseatcontrols.Seattravelmaybecomelimitedif movementisstoppedbyanobstructionintheseat's path.

HeadRestraints

Head restraints can reduce the risk of injury in the event of a rear impact. The head restraint should be adjusted so the top of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear. The head restraints have a locking button which must be pushed in to lower the head restraint to all positions. The restraints may be raised without pushing in the button.

Interior view of a car showing a car's seatbelt with a black arrow pointing to the seat (no text or symbols visible)

AdjustableHeadRestraints

88UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

WARNING!

Drivingvehiclewiththeheadrestraintsremovedor improperlyadjustedcouldcauseseriousinjuryor deathintheeventofacollision.Theheadrestraints shouldalwaysbecheckedpriortooperatingthe vehicleandneveradjustedwhilethevehicleisin motion.Alwaysadjusttheheadrestraintswhenthe vehicleisinPARK.

FrontHeatedSeats—IfEquipped

The front driver and passenger seats are heated. The controls for each heater are located near the bottom center of the instrument panel (below the heater/air conditioning controls). The heaters provide the same average heat level for both the cushion and the seatback.

After turning the ignition ON, you can choose from High, Low or Off heat settings. Amber indicator lights in each

switch indicate the level of heat in use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for High, one for Low and none for Off.

Press the switch once to select High-level heating. Press the switch a second time to select Low-level heating. Press the switch a third time to shut the heating elements Off.

When the High-level setting is selected, the heater will provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes of operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the normal High-level. If the High-level setting is selected, the system will automatically switch to Low-level after approximately 30 minutes of continuous operation. At that time, the number of illuminated LEDs changes from two to one, indicating the change. The Low-level setting will turn Off automatically after approximately 30 minutes.

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE89

NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt within two to five minutes.

WARNING!

• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise care when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for long periods of time.
• Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat that has been overheated could cause serious burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat.

CAUTION!

Repeated overheating of the seat could damage the heating element and/or degrade the material of the seat.

90UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

RearHeatedSeats—IfEquipped

On vehicles equipped with rear heated seats, the seats closest to the doors are heated. The controls for these seats are located on the rear of the center console.

Interior view of a car dashboard with control panel and directional arrows (no text or symbols)

RearHeatedSeatSwitches

After turning the ignition ON, you can choose from High, Low or Off heat settings. Amber indicator lights in each

switch indicate the level of heat in use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for High, one for Low and none for Off.

Press the switch once to select High-level heating. Press the switch a second time to select Low-level heating. Press the switch a third time to shut the heating elements Off.

When the High-level setting is selected, the heater will provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes of operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the normal High-level. If the High-level setting is selected, the system will automatically switch to Low-level after approximately 30 minutes of continuous operation. At that time, the number of illuminated LEDs changes from two to one, indicating the change. The Low-level setting will turn Off automatically after approximately 30 minutes.

NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt within two to five minutes.

WARNING!

• Persons who are unable to feel to paint the skin because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise when using these at least a treatment. It may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for long period so time.
• Donotplaceanythingontheseatthatinsulates againstheat,suchasablanketorcushion.This maycausetheseatheatertooverheat.Sittingina seatthathasbeenoverheatedcouldcauseserious burnsduetotheincreasedsurfacetemperatureof theseat.

CAUTION!

Repeated overheating of these seat could damage the heating element and or degrade them material of the seat.

60/40SplitRearSeat

ToLowerRearSeat

Either side of the rear seat can be lowered to allow for extended cargo space and still maintain some rear seating room.

NOTE: Be sure that the front seats are fully upright and positioned forward. This will allow the rear seatback to fold down easily.

92UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

1. Pull the release strap (toward the front of the vehicle) to release.

Interior view of a car seatbelt with a black arrow pointing to the seat (no text or symbols on the main subject)

RearSeatRelease

NOTE: Donotfoldtherearseatdownwiththecenter seatbeltbuckled.

1. Fold the rear seat completely forward.

Interior view of a vehicle showing seatbelt, dashboard, and passenger seat (no text or symbols visible)

RearSeatFolded

ToRaiseRearSeat

Raise the rear seatback and lock it into place. If interference from the cargo area prevents the seatback from fully locking, you will have difficulty returning the seat to its proper position.

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE93

WARNING!

• Becertainthattheseatbackissecurelylockedinto position.Iftheseatbackisnotsecurelylockedinto positiontheseatwillnotprovidetheproper stabilityforchildseatsand/orpassengers.An improperlylatchedseatcouldcauseseriousinjury.
• The cargo are in therear of the vehicle (with the reseat backs in the locked-up or folded down position) should not be used as a play area by children when the vehicle is in motion. They could be seriously injured in an accident. Children should be seated and using the proper restraint system.

Storage(RearSeatArmrest)—IfEquipped

The rear seat may be equipped with a center storage armrest.

Diagram of a car seatbelt with a belt buckle, showing seat positioning and safety symbols (no text or labels)

RearSeatArmrest

94UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

Press the latch and lift the top of the armrest to access the storage bin.

Interior view of a car seatbelt with a black arrow pointing to the seat (no text or symbols visible)

ArmrestStorageLatch

DRIVERMEMORYSEAT—IFEQUIPPED

Once programmed, the memory buttons 1 and 2 on the driver's door panel can be used to recall the driver's seat, driver's outside mirror, adjustable brake and accelerator

pedals and radio station preset settings. Your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters can also be programmed to recall the same positions when the UN-LOCK button is pressed.

Interior view of a car's air vent and dashboard with a numbered control knob (no text or symbols visible)

DriverMemorySwitches

Your vehicle is equipped with two RKE transmitters. One or both RKE transmitters can be linked to either memory position. The memory system can accommodate up to four RKE transmitters, each one linked to either of the two memory positions.

SettingMemoryPositionsandLinkingRemote KeylessEntryTransmittertoMemory

NOTE: Each time the S (SET) button and a numbered button 1 or 2 are pressed, you erase the memory settings for that button and store a new one.

1. Insert the ignition key, and turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
2. Press the driver door MEMORY button number 1 if you are setting the memory for driver 1, or button number 2 if you are setting the memory for driver 2. The system will recall any stored settings. Wait for the system to complete the memory recall before continuing to Step 3.

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE95

1. Adjust the driver's seat, recliner, and driver's sideview mirror to the desired positions.
2. Adjust the brake and accelerator pedals to the desired positions.
3. Turn on the radio and set the radio station presets (up to 12 AM and 12 FM stations can be set).
4. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the key.
5. Press and release the S (SET) button located on the driver's door.
6. Within five seconds, press and release MEMORY button 1 or 2 on the driver's door. The next step must be performed within five seconds if you desire to also use a RKE transmitter to recall memory positions.
7. Press and release the LOCK button on one of the RKE transmitters.

96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

1. Insert the ignition key, and turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
2. Select "Remote Linked to Memory" in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) and enter "Yes". Refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Customer-Programmable Features" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
3. Repeat the above steps to set the next memory position, using the other numbered memory button, or to link another RKE transmitter to memory.

MemoryPositionRecall

NOTE: The vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory positions. If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not in PARK, a message will be displayed in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC).

To recall the memory settings for driver one, press MEMORY button number 1 on the driver's door, or the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to memory position 1.

To recall the memory setting for driver two, press MEMORY button number 2 on the driver's door, or the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to memory position 2.

A recall can be cancelled by pressing any of the MEMORY buttons on the drivers door during a recall (S, 1, or 2). When a recall is cancelled, the driver's seat, driver's mirror and the pedals stop moving. A delay of one second will occur before another recall can be selected.

ToDisableaRKETransmitterLinkedtoMemory

1. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position, and remove the key.

2. Press and release MEMORY button number 1. The system will recall any memory settings stored in position

3. Wait for the system to complete the memory recall before continuing to Step 3.
4. Press and release the memory S (SET) button located on the driver's door.
5. Within five seconds, press and release MEMORY button 1 on the driver's door.
6. Within five seconds, press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter.

To disable another RKE transmitter linked to either memory position, repeat steps 1 through 5 for each RKE transmitter.

NOTE: Once programmed, all RKE transmitters linked to memory can be easily enabled or disabled at one time. Refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Customer-Programmable Features" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

EasyEntry/ExitSeat

This feature provides automatic driver's seat positioning which will enhance driver mobility out of and into the vehicle.

There are two possible Easy Entry/Exit adjustments available:

• The seat cushion will move rearward approximately 2.5 in (60 mm), if the starting position of the seat is greater than or equal to 2.67 in (68 mm) forward of the rear seat stop when the key is removed from the ignition switch. The seat will then move forward approximately 2.5 in (60 mm) when the key is placed into the ignition and turned out of the LOCK position.
• The seat will move to the position located 0.3 in (8 mm) forward of the rear stop if the starting position is between 0.9 to 2.67 in (23 to 68 mm) forward of the rear stop when the key is removed from the ignition switch. The seat will move forward to the memory/

98UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOF YOURVEHICLE

driving position when the key is placed into the ignition, and turned out of the LOCK position toward the ACC/ON position.

The Easy Entry/Exit feature will be automatically disabled if the seat is already positioned closer than 0.9 in (23 mm) forward of the rear stop. At this position, there is no benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit/Entry.

Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy Entry/Exit position.

NOTE: The Easy Entry/Exit feature is not enabled when the vehicle is delivered from the factory. The Easy Entry/Exit feature is enabled (or later disabled) through the programmable features in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Customer-Programmable Features” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

TOOPENANDCLOSETHEHOOD

Two latches must be released to open the hood.

1. Pull the release lever inside your vehicle located below the instrument panel and in front of the driver's door.

Interior view of a car dashboard and seat area showing the front panel, dashboard display, and seatbelt (no text or symbols visible)

HoodReleaseHandle

1. Reach under the hood, move safety latch to the left and lift the hood.

Front view of a car with a black arrow pointing downward on the windshield (no text or symbols)

031305631

SafetyLatchLocation

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE99

CAUTION!

Topreventpossibledamage, donotslamthehoodto closeit. Useafirmdownwardpushatthecenterof thehoodtoensurethatbothlatchesengage.

WARNING!

Besurethehoodisfullylatchedbeforedrivingyour vehicle.Ifthehoodisnotfullylatched,itcouldopen whenthevehicleisinmotionandblockyourvision. Failuretofollowthiswarningcouldresultinserious injuryordeath.

100UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

LIGHTS

MultifunctionLever

The multifunction lever controls the operation of the headlights, turn signals, headlight beam selection, instrument panel light dimming, passing light, interior courtesy/dome lights and optional fog lights. The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the steering wheel.

Close-up of a black handheld device with control buttons and a numeric display (no readable text or symbols)

031407547
MultifunctionLever

HeadlightsandParkingLights

Turn the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent for parking light operation. Turn to the second detent for headlight operation. Turn to the third detent for Automatic Headlight operation (if equipped).

Close-up of a black handheld device with control buttons and directional arrows (no readable text or symbols)

031407548
HeadlightSwitch

AutomaticHeadlights—IfEquipped

Turn the end of the multifunction lever to the third detent (AUTO) to activate the Automatic Headlight system.

Close-up of a black automotive control switch with directional arrows indicating rotation (no text or symbols on the component itself)

031407553

MultifunctionLever

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

101

This system performs two functions. With the engine running and the multifunction lever in the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on and off based on the surrounding light levels.

HeadlightsOnAutomaticallyWithWipers

If your vehicle is equipped with Automatic Headlights, it also has this customer-programmable feature. When your headlights are in the automatic mode and the engine is running, they will automatically turn on when the wiper system is on. Refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Customer-Programmable Features" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.

If your vehicle is equipped with a "Rain Sensitive Wiper System" and it is activated, the headlights will automatically turn on after the wipers complete five wipe cycles within approximately one minute, and they will turn off

102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

approximately four minutes after the wipers completely stop. Refer to “Windshield Wipers and Washers” in this section for further information.

NOTE: When your headlights come on during the daytime, the instrument panel lights will automatically dim to the lower nighttime intensity. Refer to “Lights” in this section for further information.

SmartBeam™—IfEquipped

The SmartBeam ^™ system provides increased forward lighting at night by automating high beam control through the use of a digital camera mounted on the inside rearview mirror. This camera detects vehicle specific light and automatically switches from high beams to low beams until the approaching vehicle is out of view.

NOTE: If the windshield or SmartBeam ^TM mirror is replaced, the SmartBeam ^TM mirror must be re-aimed to ensure proper performance. See your local authorized dealer.

ToActivate

1. Select "Auto High Beams." Refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Customer-Programmable Features" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
2. Turn the end of the multifunction lever to the AUTO headlight position.
3. Push the multifunction lever away from you (toward front of vehicle) to engage the high beam mode.

NOTE: This system will not activate until the vehicle is at or above 20 mph (32 km/h).

ToDeactivate

1. Pull back on the multifunction lever to manually deactivate the system (normal operation of low beams).
2. Push back on the multifunction lever once again to reactivate the system.

NOTE: Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and taillights of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to remain on longer (closer to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film, and other obstructions (sticker, toll box, etc.) on the windshield or camera lens will cause the system to function improperly.

DaytimeRunningLights—IfEquipped

The high beam headlights come on at a low intensity level whenever the engine is running, and the transmission is not in the PARK position. The lights will remain on until the ignition switch is turned to LOCK/ACC or the parking brake is engaged. The headlight switch must be used for normal nighttime driving.

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE103

AutomaticHeadlightLeveling—HIDHeadlights Only

This feature prevents the headlights from interfering with the vision of oncoming drivers. Headlight leveling automatically adjusts the height of the headlight beam in reaction to changes in vehicle pitch.

InstrumentPanelDimmer

Rotate the center potion of the lever to the extreme bottom position to fully dim the instrument panel lights and prevent the interior lights from illuminating when a door is opened.

Rotate the center portion of the lever up to increase the brightness of the instrument panel lights when the parking lights or headlights are on.

Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the next detent position to brighten the odometer and radio when the parking lights or headlights are on.

104UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the last detent to turn on the interior lighting.

手D → → → PUSH → →

031407549

DimmerControl

BatterySaverFeature

If the multifunction lever is left in the interior light position, parking light position, or the headlight position when the ignition switch is moved to the LOCK position, the battery saver feature will automatically turn off the exterior and interior lights after eight minutes. Normal operation will resume when the ignition is turned ON or when the headlight switch is turned to another position.

Lights-OnReminder

If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition switch has been turned to LOCK/ACC, a chime will sound when the driver's door is opened.

FogLights—IfEquipped

0 The fog light switch is located in the multifunction lever. To activate the fog lights, turn on the park/turn lights, low beam headlights or the Automatic Headlights and pull out the end of the multifunction lever. A light in the instrument cluster shows when the fog lights are on.

FrontFogLightControl

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE105

NOTE:

• Turning on the high beam headlights turns off the fog lights.
• A front fog light is a lighting device that provides illumination in front of the vehicle under conditions of fog, rain, snow, or dust. The front fog lights supplement the low beams of a standard headlight system.
• Proper aim and adjustment of the front fog lights should be made to prevent excessive glare for other drivers.

106UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

TurnSignals

Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.

031407551 ← 60 → 60 ← 60 PUSH → 60 → 60

TurnSignalControl

NOTE: If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside

light bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is defective.

LaneChangeAssist

Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash three times then automatically turn off.

High/LowBeamSwitch

Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch the headlights to high beam. Pull the multifunction lever toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam.

Flash-to-Pass

You can signal another vehicle by lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward the steering wheel. This will turn on the high beam headlights until the lever is released.

HeadlightTimeDelay

This feature delays turning off the headlights for 30, 60 or 90 seconds after the ignition switch is turned OFF. To activate the headlight delay, the multifunction lever must be rotated to the "Off" position after the ignition switch is turned to LOCK/ACC. Only the headlights will illuminate during this time. Refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Customer-Programmable Features" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE107

InteriorLights

The interior lighting consists of courtesy lights (below the instrument panel), an overhead console light (which contains both driver and passenger reading lights), reading lights (located above the rear doors), and a rear cargo light. Opening a door, pressing the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or turning the center of the multifunction lever to the extreme up position, will activate all interior courtesy lights.

108UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

FrontMap/ReadingLights

These lights are mounted in the overhead console. Each light can be turned on by pressing the recessed area of the lens. To turn these lights off, press the recessed area of the lens a second time. There are also reading lights located above the rear doors. Each light can be turned on by pressing the front recessed area of the lens. To turn these lights off, press the recessed area of the lens a second time.

Top-down view of a car air conditioner unit with two vented seats and airflow indicators (no text or symbols)

FrontMap/ReadingLights

The windshield wiper/washer control lever is located on the right side of the steering column. The front wipers are operated by rotating a switch, located on the end of the lever. For information on the rear wiper/washer, refer to "Rear Window Features" in "Understanding the Features of Your Vehicle".

REAF FRONT MIST PULL LO HI

036407502

WindshieldWiper/WasherSwitch

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE109

WindshieldWiperOperation

Rotate the end of the lever upward to the LO position for low-speed wiper operation.

Rotate the end of the lever upward to the HI position for high-speed wiper operation.

MIST REAR PULL LQ HI

031507503

FrontWiperControl

110UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

CAUTION!

Alwaysremoveanybuildupofsnowthatprevents thewindshieldwiperbladesfromreturningtothe "park" position. If the windshieldwiperswitch is turned off, and the blades cannot return to the "park" position, damagetothewipermotormayoccur.

IntermittentWiperSystem

Use one of the five intermittent wiper speeds when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle, with a variable pause between cycles, desirable. Turn the end of the lever to one of the five delay positions for the desired delay interval. The delay can be regulated from a maximum of approximately 18 seconds between cycles, to a cycle every 1/2 second.

MIST FRONT PULL LO HI REAR

031507503

FrontWiperControl

NOTE: The wiper delay times depend on vehicle speed. If the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph (16 km/h), delay times will be doubled.

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE111

WindshieldWasherOperation

To use the washer, pull the lever toward you and hold while spray is desired. If the lever is pulled while in the delay range, the wiper will operate for several wipe cycles after the lever is released, and then resume the intermittent interval previously selected.

If the lever is pulled while in the off position, the wipers will operate for several wipe cycles, then turn off.

WARNING!

Suddenlossofvisibilitythroughthewindshield couldleadtoanaccident.Youmightnotseeother vehiclesorotherobstacles.Toavoidsuddenicingof thewindshieldduringfreezingweather,warmthe windshieldwiththedefrosterbeforeandduring windshieldwasheruse.

Mist

Use the Mist feature when weather conditions make occasional usage of the wipers necessary. Pull down and release the control lever for a single wiping cycle.

REAR FRONT MIST▼ PULL LD HI

031507504
MistControl

112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

RainSensingWipers—IfEquipped

This feature senses moisture on the windshield and automatically activates the wipers for the driver. The feature is especially useful for road splash or overspray from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to one of five settings to activate this feature.

The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the multifunction lever. Wiper delay position 1 is the least sensitive, and wiper delay position 5 is the most sensitive. Setting 3 should be used for normal rain conditions. Settings 1 and 2 can be used if the driver desires less wiper sensitivity. Settings 4 and 5 can be used if the driver desires more sensitivity. Place the wiper switch in the OFF position when not using the system.

NOTE:

- The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the wiper switch is in the low or high-speed position.

• The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly when ice, or dried salt water is present on the windshield.
• Use of Rain-X® or products containing wax or silicone may reduce Rain Sensing performance.
• A customer programmable feature in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) allows the Rain Sensing feature to be turned off. Refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.

The Rain Sensing system has protection features for the wiper blades and arms, and will not operate under the following conditions:

- LowAmbientTemperature— When the ignition is first turned ON, the Rain Sensing system will not operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed is greater than 0 mph (0 km/h), or the outside temperature is greater than 32°F (0°C).

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE113

- TransmissioninNEUTRALPosition—When the ignition is ON, and the transmission is in the NEUTRAL position, the Rain Sensing system will not operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), or the shift lever is moved out of the NEUTRAL position.

TILT/TELESCOPINGSTEERINGCOLUMN

This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping control handle is located below the steering wheel at the end of the steering column.

Interior view of a car seatbelt with visible seatbelt and seatbelt connectors (no text or symbols)

Tilt/TelescopingControlHandle

To unlock the steering column, push the control handle downward (toward the floor). To tilt the steering column, move the steering wheel upward or downward as desired. To lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull the steering wheel outward or push it inward as desired. To lock the steering column in position, push the control handle upward until fully engaged.

114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

Donotadjustthesteeringcolumnwhiledriving. Adjustingthesteeringcolumnwhiledrivingordrivingwiththesteeringcolumnunlocked,couldcause thedrivertolosecontrolofthevehicle.Besurethe steeringcolumnislockedbeforedrivingyourvehicle.Failuretofollowthiswarningmayresultin seriousinjuryordeath.

ADJUSTABLEPEDALS—IFEQUIPPED

This feature allows both the brake and accelerator pedals to move toward or away from the driver to provide improved position with the steering wheel. The adjustable pedal system is designed to allow a greater range of driver comfort for steering wheel tilt and seat position. The position of the brake and accelerator pedals can be adjusted without compromising safety or comfort in actuating the pedals.

Close-up of a car's front panel with two switches and directional arrows, no visible text or symbols

AdjustablePedalSwitch

Press the bottom of the switch to move the pedals forward (away from the driver).

Press the top of the switch to move the pedals rearward (toward the driver).

- The pedals can be adjusted with the ignition OFF.

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE115

• The pedals can be adjusted while driving.
• The pedals cannot be adjusted when the vehicle is in REVERSE (R) or when the Electronic Speed Control is on. A message will be displayed in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) if the pedals are attempted to be adjusted when the system is locked out ("Adjustable Pedal Disabled — Cruise Control Set" or "Adjustable Pedal Disabled — Shifter In Reverse"). Refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.

CAUTION!

Donotplaceanyarticleundertheadjustablepedal's orimpedeitsabilitytomoveasitmaycausedamage tothepedalcontrols.Pedaltravelmaybecomelimitedifmovementisstoppedbyanobstructioninthe adjustablepedal'spath.

WARNING!

Donotadjustthepedalswhilethevehicleismoving. Youcouldlosecontrolandhaveanaccident.Always adjustthepedalswhilethevehicleisparked.

116UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

ELECTRONICSPEEDCONTROL—IFEQUIPPED

When engaged, Electronic Speed Control takes over accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph (40 km/h).

The Electronic Speed Control lever is located on the right side of the steering wheel.

CANCEL ▲RESUME ACCEL CRUISE ON/OFF ▼SET DECEL

81bc4c2c

ElectronicSpeedControlLever

NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Electronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated simultaneously. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired vehicle set speed.

ToActivate

Push the ON/OFF button. The Cruise Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate. To turn the system OFF, push the ON/OFF button a second time. The Cruise Indicator Light will turn off. The system should be turned OFF when not in use.

WARNING!

LeavingtheElectronicSpeedControlSystemon whennotinuseisdangerous.Youcouldaccidentally setthesystemorcauseittogofasterthanyouwant. Youcouldlosecontrolandhaveanaccident.Always leavethesystemOFFwhenyouarenotusingit.

ToSetaDesiredSpeed

When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, press down on the lever and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed.

NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed and on level ground before pressing the SET lever.

ToDeactivate

A soft tap on the brake pedal, pulling the lever toward you, or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will deactivate Electronic Speed Control without erasing

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

the set speed memory. Pressing the ON/OFF button or turning off the ignition switch erases the set speed memory.

ToResumeSpeed

To resume a previously set speed, push the RESUME ACCEL lever up and release. Resume can be used at any speed above 25 mph (40 km/h).

ToVarytheSpeedSetting

When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can increase speed by pushing up and holding the RESUME ACCEL lever. If the lever is continually held in the RESUME ACCEL position, the set speed will continue to increase until the lever is released, then the new set speed will be established.

Tapping RESUME ACCEL once will result in a 1 mph (2 km/h) speed increase. Each time the lever is tapped the vehicle speed increases, so that tapping the lever three times will increase speed by 3 mph (5 km/h).

118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

To decrease speed while the Electronic Speed Control is set, push down and hold the SET DECEL lever. If the lever is continually held in the SET DECEL position, the set speed will continue to decrease until the lever is released. Release the lever when the desired speed is reached, and the new set speed will be established.

Tapping the SET DECEL lever once will result in a 1 mph (2 km/h) speed decrease. Each time the lever is tapped, vehicle speed decreases.

ToAccelerateforPassing

Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.

UsingElectronicSpeedControlOnHills

The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the vehicle set speed.

NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control System maintains speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal.

On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed Control.

WARNING!

ElectronicSpeedControlcanbedangerouswherethe systemcannotmaintainaconstantspeed.Yourvehiclecouldgotoofastfortheconditions,andyou couldlosecontrol.Anaccidentcouldbetheresult. DonotuseElectronicSpeedControlinheavytraffic oronroadsthatarewinding,icy,snow-coveredor slippery.

PARKSENSE®REARPARKASSIST—IF EQUIPPED

ParkSense® provides visible and audible indications of the distance between the rear fascia and the detected obstacle when backing up. Refer to the Warning Section and Note Section for limitations of this system and recommendations.

ParkSense® will remember the last system state (enabled or disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is changed to the ON position.

ParkSense® can be active only when the shift lever is in REVERSE. If ParkSense® is enabled at this shift lever position, the system will be active until the vehicle speed is increased to approximately 11 mph (18 km/h) or above. The system will be active again if the vehicle speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately 10 mph (16 km/h).

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE119

ParkSense®Sensors

The four ParkSense® sensors, located in the rear fascia, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within the sensors' field of view.

The sensors can detect obstacles from approximately 12 to 59 in (30 to 150 cm) from the rear fascia in the horizontal direction, depending on the location and orientation of the obstacle and the type of obstacle.

120UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

ParkSense®WarningDisplay

The ParkSense ^® warning display, located in the headliner near the flipper glass, provides both visible and audible warnings to indicate the distance between the rear fascia and the detected obstacle.

Top-down view of a car rearview mirror with an arrow pointing to the lens (no text or symbols visible)

ParkSense®Display

When the ignition is turned to the ON position, the warning display will turn ON all of its LEDs for about one second. Each side of the warning display has six yellow and two red LEDs. The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the red LED is ON.

The system dimly illuminates the two outer most yellow LEDs when it is ON and detecting no obstacles. The following chart shows the warning display operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:

WARNINGDISPLAYDISTANCES

DISPLAYLEDOBS	TACLEDISTANCEFROM:LEDCOLORAUDIBLESIGNAL
	REARCORNERSRE	ARCENTER
1st LED 59 in (1)	50 cm) Yellow Yes, Half	Second
2nd LED 51 in (1)	30 cm) Yellow None
3rd LED 45 in (1)	15 cm) Yellow None
4th LED 31.5 in	(80 cm) 39 in (100 cm)	Yellow None
5th LED 25.5 in	(65 cm) 33.5 in	(85 cm)	Yellow None
6th LED	20 in (50 cm)	28 in (70 cm)	Yellow	None
7th LED	16 in (40 cm)	20 in (50 cm)	Red	Yes, Intermittent
8th LED	6 in (15 cm)	12 in (30 cm)	Red	Yes, Continuous

NOTE: The Rear Park Assist system will MUTE the radio, if on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.

Enable/DisableParkSense®

ParkSense ^® can be enabled and disabled with a switch located on the upper switch bank of the instrument panel.

Press the switch once to turn ParkSense® on, push the switch a second time to turn ParkSense® off.

122UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

When the switch is pressed to disable the system, the instrument cluster will display the "PARK ASSIST DISABLED" message. Refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information. When the shift lever is changed to REVERSE and the system is disabled, the instrument cluster will actuate a single chime, once per ignition cycle, and it will display the message.

The ParkSense® switch LED will be ON when the system is disabled or defective. The ParkSense® switch LED will be OFF when the system is enabled.

ServiceParkSense®

When ParkSense® is defective, the instrument cluster will actuate a single chime, once per ignition cycle, and it will display the "SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM" message. Refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information. If "SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM" appears in the EVIC after making sure the rear fascia/bumper is clean and free of snow, ice, mud, or other debris, see your authorized dealer.

CleaningParkSense®

Clean the ParkSense® sensors with water, car wash soap and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could damage the sensors.

SystemUsagePrecautions

NOTE:

• Ensure that the rear bumper is free of dirt and debris to keep ParkSense® operating properly.

• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could affect the performance of ParkSense®.

• When you turn ParkSense® off, the instrument cluster will display "PARK ASSIST DISABLED." Furthermore, once you turn ParkSense® off, it remains off until you turn it on again, even if you cycle the ignition key.

• When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE position and ParkSense® is turned off, the instrument cluster will display "PARK ASSIST DISABLED" message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
• ParkSense®, when on, will MUTE the radio when it is sounding a tone.
• If a ParkSense® system malfunction occurs, a single chime will sound once per ignition cycle. In addition, the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) will display "SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM". If this occurs making sure the rear fascia/bumper is free from snow, ice, mud, dirt and debris, see your authorized dealer.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123

• Clean the ParkSense® sensors regularly, taking care not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt, or debris. Failure to do so can result in the system not working properly. ParkSense® might not detect an obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could provide a false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia/bumper.
• Objects must not be within 12 in (30 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper while driving the vehicle. Failure to do so can result in the system misinterpreting a close object as a sensor problem, causing the "SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM" message to be displayed in the instrument cluster.

124UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

CAUTION!

• ParkSense® isonlyaparkingaidanditisunable torecognize everyobstacle, includingsmallobstacles. Parkingcurbsmightbetemporarilydetectedornotdetectedatall. Obstacleslocated aboveorbelowthesensorswillnotbedetected whentheyareincloseproximity.
• The vehicle must bedrivenslowly when using ParkSense® to be able to stop in time when the obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the driver looks over his/her shoulder when using ParkSense®.

WARNING!

• Driversmustbecarefulwhenbackingupeven whenusingtheParkSense®RearParkAssistSystem.Alwayscheckcarefullybehindyourvehicle, lookbehindyou,andbesuretocheckforpedestrians,animals,othervehicles,obstructions,and blindspotsbeforebackingup.Youareresponsible forsafetyandmustcontinuetopayattentionto yoursurroundings.Failureretodosocanresultin seriousinjuryordeath.

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

- BeforeusingtheParkSense®RearParkAssist System,itisstronglyrecommendedthattheball mountandhitchballassemblyisdisconnected fromthevehiclewhenthevehicleisnotusedfor towing.Failureretodosocanresultininjuryor damagetovehiclesorobstaclesbecausethehitch ballwillbemuchclosertotheobstaclethanthe rearfasciawhenthewarningdisplayturnsonthe singleflashingarcandsoundsthecontinuous tone.Also,theParkSense®sensorscoulddetect theballmountandhitchballassembly,depending onitssizeandshape,givingafalseindicationthat anobstacleisbehindthevehicle.

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE125

PARKVIEW® REARBACKUPCAMERA—IF EQUIPPED

Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView®Rear Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen image of the rear of your vehicle whenever the shift lever is put into REVERSE. The image will be displayed on the Navigation/Multimedia radio display screen. The ParkView®camera is located on the rear liftgate.

WARNING!

Driversmustbecarefulwhenbackingupevenwhen usingtheParkView®RearBackUpCamera.Always checkcarefullybehindyourvehicle,andbesureto checkforpedestrians,animals,othervehicles,obstructions,orblindspotsbeforebackingup.Youare responsibleforthesafetyofyoursurroundingsand mustcontinuetopayattentionwhilebackingup. Failuretodosocanresultinseriousiusinjuryordeath.

126UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

CAUTION!

• Toavoidvehicledamage, ParkView® shouldonly beusedasaparkingaid. The ParkView® camerais unabletovieweveryobstacleorobjectinyour drivepath.
• Toavoidvehicledamage,thevehiclemustbe drivenslowlywhenusingParkView®tobeableto stopintimewhenanobstacleisseen.Itisrecommendedthatthedriverlookfrequentlyoverhis/hershoulderwhenusingParkView®.

NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or anything else builds up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.

TurningParkView®OnorOff—With Navigation/MultimediaRadio

1. Press the "menu" hard key.
2. Select "system setup" soft key.
3. Press the "camera setup" soft key.
4. Enable or disable the rear camera feature by selecting "enable rear camera in reverse" soft key.
5. Press the "save" soft key.
6. When the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE, an image of the rear of the vehicle will appear with a caution note to "check entire surroundings" displayed across the top of the screen. After five seconds this note will disappear.
7. When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE, the rear camera mode is exited and the navigation or audio screen appears again.

TurningParkView®OnorOff—Without Navigation/MultimediaRadio

1. Press the "menu" hard key.
2. Select "system setup" soft key.
3. Enable or disable the rear camera feature by selecting "enable rear camera in reverse" soft key.
4. When the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE, an image of the rear of the vehicle will appear with a caution note to "check entire surroundings" displayed across the top of the screen. After five seconds this note will disappear.
5. When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE, the rear camera mode is exited and the audio screen appears again.

OVERHEADCONSOLE

The overhead console contains courtesy/reading lights, storage for sunglasses. Universal Garage Door Opener

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE127

(HomeLink®) and power sunroof switches may also be included, if equipped.

Top-down view of a car dashboard with front and back panels (no visible text or symbols)

OverheadConsole

8125e191

Courtesy/ReadingLights

At the forward end of the console are two courtesy/reading lights.

128UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

Press the lens to turn these lights on. Press a second time to turn the lights off.

The lights also turn on when a front door or rear door is opened. The lights will also turn on when the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is pressed.

SunglassesStorage

At the rear of the console a compartment is provided for the storage of a pair of sunglasses.

The storage compartment access is a "push/push" design. Push the finger depression on the overhead console to open. Push the finger depression to close.

GARAGEDOOROPENER—IFEQUIPPED

HomeLink® replaces up to three remote controls (hand-held transmitters) that operate devices such as garage door openers, motorized gates, lighting or home security systems. The HomeLink® unit operates off your vehicle's battery.

The HomeLink®buttons are located in the overhead console and contain one, two or three dots/lines designating the different HomeLink®channels.

Close-up of a metallic control panel with three vertical slots and three horizontal bars, no visible text or symbols.

HomeLink®Buttons

NOTE: HomeLink® is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.

WARNING!

- Yourmotorizeddoororgatewilopenandclose whileyouaretrainingtheUniversalTransceiver. Donottrainthetransceiverifpeople, petsorother objectsareinthepathofthedoororgate. Onlyuse thistransceiverwithagaragedooropenerthathas a"stopandreverse"featureasrequiredbyfederal safetystandards. Thisincludesmostgaragedoor openermodelsmanufacturedafter1982.Donot useagaragedooropenerwithoutthesesafety features.Calltoll-free1-800-355-3515or,onthe Internetatwww.HomeLink.comforsafetyinformationorassistance.

(Continued)

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE129

WARNING!(Continued)

- Vehicleexhaustcontainscarbonmonoxide,adangerousgas.Donotrunyourvehicleinthegarage whiletrainingthetransceiver.Exhaustgascan causeseriousinjuryordeath.

ProgrammingHomeLink®

BeforeYouBegin

If you have not trained any of the HomeLink®buttons, erase all channels before you begin training.

To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for up to 20 seconds. The EVIC will display "CLEARING CHANNELS." Release the buttons when the EVIC message states "CHANNELS CLEARED."

It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of the device being copied to

130UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOUR VEHICLE

HomeLink ^® for more efficient training and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal.

Your vehicle should be parked outside of the garage while training.

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.

2. Place the handheld transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm) from the HomeLink® buttons while keeping the EVIC display in view.

For optimal training, point the battery end of the handheld transmitter away from the HomeLink ^® .

1. Simultaneously, press and hold both the chosen HomeLink® button and the handheld transmitter button until the EVIC display changes from "CHANNEL # TRAINING" to "CHANNEL # TRAINED."

Then release both the HomeLink® and handheld transmitter buttons.

If the EVIC display states "DID NOT TRAIN" repeat Step 3. If the signal is too weak, replace the battery in the handheld transmitter.

It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage door may open and close while you train.

NOTE: Some gate operators and garage door openers may require you to replace Step 3 with procedures noted in the "Gate Operator/Canadian Programming" section.

1. Press and hold the just-trained HomeLink®button. If the channel has been trained, the EVIC display will now state "CHANNEL # TRANSMIT."

If the EVIC display still states "CHANNEL # TRAINING" repeat Step 3.

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE131

NOTE: After training a HomeLink® channel, if the garage door does not operate with HomeLink® and the garage door opener was manufactured after 1995, the garage door opener may have rolling code. If so, proceed to the heading "Programming A Rolling Code System."

5. PROGRAMMING A ROLLING CODE SYSTEM

At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), locate the "Learn" or "Training" button.

This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the garage door opener motor (it is NOT the button normally used to open and close the door).

Technical diagram showing installation of a device with labeled components and a close-up view of the assembly.

1 — Garage Door Opener
2 — Training Button

1. Firmly press and release the LEARN or TRAINING button. The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer.

NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next step after the LEARN button has been pressed.

132 UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOUR VEHICLE

1. Return to the vehicle and press the programmed HomeLink® button twice (holding the button for two seconds each time). If the device is plugged in and activates, programming is complete.

If the device does not activate, press the button a third time (for two seconds) to complete the training.

If you have any problems or require assistance, please call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.

To program the remaining two HomeLink®buttons, repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT erase the channels.

GateOperator/CanadianProgramming

Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter signals to "time-out" (or quit) after several seconds of transmission – which may not be long enough for HomeLink® to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to "time-out" in the same manner.

It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling process to prevent possible overheating of the garage door or gate motor.

If you are having difficulties programming a garage door opener or a gate operator, replace "Programming HomeLink" Step 3 with the following:

1. ContinuetopressandholdtheHomeLink®button, whileyoupressandrelease("cycle"),yourhandheld transmittereverytwosecondsuntilHomeLink®has successfullyacceptedthefrequencysignal.TheEVIC displaywillchangefrom"CHANNEL#TRAINING"to "CHANNEL#TRAINED."

If you unplugged the device for training, plug it back in at this time.

Then proceed with Step 4 under "Programming HomeLink®" earlier in this section.

UsingHomeLink®

To operate, press and release the programmed HomeLink® button. Activation will now occur for the trained device (i.e., garage door opener, gate operator, security system, entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.). The handheld transmitter of the device may also be used at any time.

ReprogrammingASingleHomeLink®Button

To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, follow these steps:

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink®button for 20 seconds until the EVIC display states "CHANNEL #TRAINING." Donotreleasethebutton.

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE133

1. Without releasing the button, proceed with Programming HomeLink®Step 2 and follow all remaining steps.

Security

It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn in your vehicle.

To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for 20 seconds until the EVIC message states "CHANNELS CLEARED." Note that all channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be erased.

The HomeLink®Universal Transceiver is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.

TroubleshootingTips

If you are having trouble programming HomeLink ^® , here are some of the most common solutions:

- Replace the battery in the original transmitter.

134UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

• Press the LEARN button on the garage door opener to complete the training for rolling code.
• Did you unplug the device for training and remember to plug it back in?

If you are having any problems or require assistance, please call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.

GeneralInformation

This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference.

2. This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation.

NOTE: The transmitter has been tested and it complies with FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the device.

The term "IC:" before the certification/registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.

POWERSUNROOF—IFEQUIPPED

The power sunroof switch is located between the sun visors on the overhead console.

Interior view of a train car backseat with digital display and control panel (no visible text or symbols)

PowerSunroofSwitch

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE135

WARNING!

• Neverleavechildreninvehiclewiththekeyin theignitionswitch.Occupants,particularlyunattendedchildren,canbecomeentrappedbythe powersunroofwhileoperatingthepowersunroof switch.Suchentrapmentmayresultinserious injuryordeath.
• Inanaccident, thereisagreateriskofbeing thrownfromvehiclewithanopensunroof. You couldalsobeseriouslyinjuredorkilled. Always fastenyourseatbeltproperlyandmakesureall passengersareproperlysecuredtoo.
• Donotallowsmallchildrentooperatethesun-roof. Neverallowyourfingers, otherbodyparts, or anyobjecttoprojectthroughthesunroofopening. Injurymayresult.

136UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

OpeningSunroof—Express

Press the switch rearward and release, and the sunroof will open automatically from any position. The sunroof will open fully, then stop automatically. This is called "Express Open". During Express Open operation, any movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.

ClosingSunroof—Express

Press the switch forward and release, and the sunroof will close automatically from any position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automatically. This is called "Express Close". During Express Close operation, any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.

PinchProtectFeature

This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an obstruction is detected, the sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if this occurs. Next, press the switch forward and release to Express Close.

PinchProtectOverride

If a known obstruction (ice, debris, etc.) prevents closing the sunroof, press the switch forward and hold for two seconds after the reversal occurs. This allows the sunroof to move toward the closed position.

NOTE: Pinch protection is disabled while the switch is pressed.

VentingSunroof—Express

Press and release the "Vent" button, and the sunroof will open to the vent position. This is called "Express Vent", and will occur regardless of sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.

SunshadeOperation

The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens.

NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is open.

WindBuffeting

Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window.

SunroofMaintenance

Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the glass panel.

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE137

IgnitionOFFOperation

The power sunroof switches remain active for up approximately ten minutes after the ignition switch has been turned OFF. Opening either front door will cancel this feature.

SunroofFullyClosed

Press the switch forward and release to ensure that the sunroof is fully closed.

ELECTRICALPOWEROUTLETS

Your vehicle is equipped with 12 Volt (13 Amp) power outlets that can be used to power cellular phones, small electronics and other low powered electrical accessories. The power outlets are labeled with either a "key" or a "battery" symbol to indicate how the outlet is powered. Power outlets labeled with a "key" are powered when the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position, while the outlets labeled with a "battery" are connected directly to the battery and powered at all times.

138UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

NOTE:

• All accessories connected to the "battery" powered outlets should be removed or turned off when the vehicle is not in use to protect the battery against discharge.
• To ensure proper operation a MOPAR®knob and element must be used.
• Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts (13 Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watt (13 Amp) power rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system will need to be replaced.

The front power outlets are located to the left and right of the convenience tray (lower center of instrument panel). Pull lightly on the tab of the plastic cover to access these power outlets.

12V DC 12V DC 034507157

FrontPowerOutlets

The power outlet located on the left side of the tray can be used to power a conventional cigar lighter.

The rear power outlet (if equipped) is located in the left rear cargo area.

Close-up of a car door panel with a digital lock icon and an arrow pointing to the button (no text or symbols on the main object)

RearPowerOutlet

WARNING!

Toavoidseriousinjuryordeath:

- Onlydevicesdesignedforuseinthistypeof outletshouldbeinsertedintoany12Voltoutlet.

(Continued)

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE139

WARNING!(Continued)

• Donottouchwithwethands.
• Closethelidwhennotinuseandwhiledriving thevehicle.
• If this outletismishandled, it may cause an electric shock and failure.

CAUTION!

- Manyaccessoriesthatcanbepluggedindraw powerfromthevehicle'sbattery,evenwhennotin use(i.e.,cellularphones,etc.).Eventually,if pluggedinlongenough,thevehicle'sbatterywill dischargesufficientlytodegradebatterylife and/orpreventtheenginefromstarting.

(Continued)

140UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

CAUTION!(Continued)

• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers, vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the battery even more quickly. Only us these intermittently and with greater caution.
• Aftertheuseofhighpowerdrawaccessories,or longperiodsofthevehiclenotbeingstarted(with accessoriesstillpluggedin),thevehiclemustbe drivenasufficientlengthoftimetoallowthe generatortorechargethevehicle'sbattery.

POWERINVERTER—IFEQUIPPED

There is a 115 Volt, 150 Watt inverter outlet located on the back of the center console to convert DC current to AC current. This outlet can power cellular phones, electronics and other low power devices requiring power up to 150 Watts. Certain high-end video games, such as PlayStation3 and XBox360 will exceed this power limit, as will most power tools.

Interior view of a car dashboard with air conditioners and a directional indicator (no text or symbols on the main body)

PowerInverter

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE141

The power inverter is designed with built-in overload protection. If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded, the power inverter will automatically shut down. Once the electrical device has been removed from the outlet the inverter should automatically reset. If the power rating exceeds approximately 170 Watts, the power inverter may have to be reset manually. To reset the inverter manually press the power inverter button OFF and ON. To avoid overloading the circuit, check the power ratings on electrical devices prior to using the inverter.

142UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

Press the power inverter switch (located on the upper switch bank) to turn the power on to the outlet. Press the switch again to turn the power off.

ESP OFF P10 OFF 035006692

PowerInverterSwitch

NOTE: When the power inverter switch is pressed, there will be a delay of approximately one second before the inverter status indicator turns ON. The status indicator of the AC power inverter indicates whether the inverter is producing AC power.

WARNING!

Toavoidseriousinjuryordeath:

• Donotuseathree-prongadaptor.
- Donotinsertanyobjectsintothereceptacles.
• Donottouchwithwethands.
- Closethelidwhennotinuse.
- If this outletismishandleditmaycauseanelectric shock and failure.

CUPHOLDERS

There are two cupholders for the front seat passengers located in the center console.

Interior view of a car showing the dashboard and steering wheel (no visible text or symbols)

FrontCupholders

The rear passengers have access to two cupholders that pull out from the lower center of the rear seat.

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE143

Technical illustration of a mechanical component with no visible text or symbols

RearCupholders

CARGOAREAFEATURES

CargoLight

The cargo area light is activated by opening the liftgate, opening any door, or by rotating the dimmer control on the multifunction lever to the extreme top position. If all doors are closed and only the liftgate is open, pushing on

144UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

the cargo light lens surface will turn off all interior lights. Push on the lens surface a second time to restore the interior lights to normal operation.

RearStorageCompartment

The rear storage compartment is located on the driver's side behind the second row seat.

Interior view of a mechanical or architectural component with internal compartments and a directional arrow (no text or symbols visible)

RearStorageCompartment

RetractableCargoAreaCover—IfEquipped

NOTE: The purpose of this cover is for privacy, not to secure loads. It will not prevent cargo from shifting or protect passengers from loose cargo.

To cover the cargo area:

1. Grasp the cover at the center handle. Pull it over the cargo area.
2. Insert the pins on the ends of the cover into the slots in the pillar trim cover.
3. The liftgate may be opened with the cargo cover in place.

Top-down view of a car backseat showing seat compartments and a highlighted rear portion with an arrow pointing to the seat (no text or symbols)

RearCargoCover

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE145

WARNING!

Inanaccident, aloosecargocoverinthevehicle could cause injury. It could fly around in as sudden stop and strikes someone in the vehicle. Donot store the cargocover on the cargofloor or in the passenger compartment. Removethecover from the vehicle whentaken from its mounting. Donot store it in the vehicle.

146UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

CargoTie-DownHooks

The cargo tie-downs, located on the cargo area floor, should be used to safely secure loads when the vehicle is moving.

Interior view of a car trunk with four directional arrows indicating movement or orientation (no text or symbols)

CargoTie-DownHooks

WARNING!

• Tohelpprotectagainstpersonalinjury,passengers shouldnotbeseatedintherearcargoarea.The rearcargospaceisintendedforloadcarrying purposesonly,notforpassengers,whoshouldsit inseatsanduseseatbelts.
• Cargotie-downhooksarenotsafeanchorsforachildseattetherstrap.Inasuddenstoporcollision,ahookcouldpullooseandallowthechildseattocomeloose.Achildcouldbebadlyinjured.Useonlytheanchorsprovidedforchildseattethers.

Theweightandpositionofcargoandpassengers canchangethevehiclecenterofgravityandvehiclehandling.Toavoidlossofcontrolresulting inpersonalinjury,followtheseguidelinesfor loadingyourvehicle:

(Continued)

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE147

WARNING!(Continued)

• Donotcarryloadswhichexceedtheloadlimits describedonthelabelattachedtotheleftdooror leftdoorcenterpillar.
• Alwaysplacecargoevenlyonthecargofloor.Put heavierobjectsaslowandasfarforwardas possible.
• Placeasmuchcargoaspossibleinfrontoftherear axle.Toomuchweightorimproperlyplaced weightoverorbehindtherearaxlecancausethe rearofthevehicletosway.
• Donotpile luggage or cargohigher than the top of these at back. This could impair visibility or become dangerous projectile in as sudden stop or collision.

CargoLoadFloor

The panel in the load floor is reversible for added utility. One side is carpeted and the other side features a plastic lined tray which holds a variety of items.

Top-down view of a car trunk with a black arrow pointing to the front panel (no text or symbols visible)

CargoLoadFloor

148UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

The cargo load floor is held by spring loaded latches. In order to use the cargo load floor, use the following procedure:

NOTE: The cargoloadfloorlatchess should not be used as cargotie - downs.

1. Flip up the pull loop(s) so they are perpendicular (straight up) to the top surface of the tray.
2. Pull up on the loop(s) and twist 90 degrees, so they are parallel to the slotted hole in the tray.
3. Lift the tray over the loop(s), and reposition the tray.
4. Pull up on the loop(s) and twist 90 degrees, so they are perpendicular (straight up) to the slotted hole in tray.
5. Push the loop(s) back down, so they are parallel to the top of the tray.

REARWINDOWFEATURES

RearWindowWiper/Washer

The rear wiper/washer is controlled by a rotary switch located on the control lever. The control lever is located on the right side of the steering column.

REAR FRONT PULSE LO HI MIST

031507505
RearWiper/WasherControl

Rotate the switch upward to the "On" position to activate the rear wiper.

NOTE: The rear wiper operates in an intermittent mode only.

Rotate the switch upward to the "washer" position to activate that rear washer. The washer pump will continue to operate as long as the lever or ring is aged. Upon release, the wipers will cycle two times the returning to the set position.

If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned OFF, the wiper will automatically return to the "park" position if power accessory delay is active. Power accessory delay can be cancelled by opening the door; if this happens, the rear wiper will stop at its current position and will not go to "park".

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE149

If the liftgate flipper glass is open, connection to the rear window wiper is interrupted preventing activation of the rear wiper blade. When the liftgate flipper glass is closed, the rear wiper switch, or the ignition switch, needs to be turned OFF and ON to restart the rear wiper.

RearWindowDefroster

The rear window defroster button is located on the climate control panel. Press this button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator in the button will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately 10 minutes. For an additional five minutes of operation, press the button a second time.

NOTE: To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear window defroster only when the engine is operating.

CAUTION!

Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements:

• Usecarewhenwashingtheinsideoftherear window.Donotuseabrasivewindowcleanerson theinteriorsurfaceofthewindow.Useasoftcloth andamildwashingsolution,wipingparallelto theheatingelements.Labelscanbepeeledoff aftersoakingwithwarmwater.
• Donotusescrapers, sharpinstruments, or abrasive window cleaners on the interiorsurface of the window.
• Keepallobjectsasafedistancefromthewindow.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

CONTENTS

■Instrument Panel Features.... 1 5 4
■Instrument Cluster 155
■Instrument Cluster Descriptions ..... 1 5 6
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) .. 166

□Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Displays 168
□Trip Functions.... 171
□Performance Pages — If Equipped . . . . . . . 1 7 3
□Compass Display.... 177

□Driver-Selectable Surround Sound (DSS) – If Equipped 17
□Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features) 179
□System Status 183

■Media Center 730N/430 (RER/REN/RBZ) — AM/FM Stereo Radio And CD/DVD/HDD/ NAV — If Equipped.... 184

☐Operating Instructions — Voice Command System — If Equipped ..... 185

152UNDERSTANDINGYOURINSTRUMENTPANEL

☐Operating Instructions — Uconnect™ phone — If Equipped .... 185

□Clock Setting Procedure — RBZ Radio ..... 185

☐Clock Setting Procedure — RER/REN Radio 187

■Media Center 130 (RES) — AM/FM Stereo Radio With CD Player (MP3 AUX Jack). . . . . . . 1 8 9

□Operating Instructions — Radio Mode ..... 189

☐Operation Instructions — CD Mode For CD And MP3 Audio Play 192

□Notes On Playing MP3 Files ..... 194

☐Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode . . . . 197

■Media Center 130 (RES/RSC) — AM/FM Stereo Radio With CD Player (MP3 AUX Jack) And Sirius Radio .... 198

□Operating Instructions — Radio Mode ..... 198

☐Operation Instructions — CD Mode For CD And MP3 Audio Play 204

□Notes On Playing MP3 Files ..... 2 0 6

□List Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) ..... 209

□Info Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) ..... 209

■Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) — If Equipped 210

□ Connecting The iPod® 211

□ Using This Feature 211

□Controlling The iPod® Using Radio Buttons 2 11

□Play Mode.... 2 1 2

□List Or Browse Mode 213

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 153

■Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite Radio) — If Equipped (REN/RER/RBZ/RES Radios Only). . 215

□System Activation.... 215

□Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification Number (ESN/SID) 216

□Selecting Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite) Mode.... 2 1 6

□Satellite Antenna 216

□Reception Quality 217

☐Operating Instructions - Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite) Mode ..... 2 1 7

☐Operating Instructions - Uconnect™ phone (If Equipped) 219

■Kicker®High Performance Sound System With Driver-Selectable Surround (DSS) – If Equipped 2 2 0

■Remote Sound System Controls — If Equipped 2 2 3

□Radio Operation....2 2 3

□CD Player....2 2 4

■CD/DVD Disc Maintenance....2 2 4

■ Radio Operation And Cellular Phones ..... 225

■Climate Controls 2 2 5

□ Automatic Temperature Control ..... 225

□Operating Tips 232

□ Operating Tips Chart 234

154UNDERSTANDINGYOURINSTRUMENTPANEL

INSTRUMENTPANELFEATURES

Diagram of a car dashboard with numbered parts for identification and assembly reference.

1 — Air Outlet 5 — Upper Switch Bank 9 — Lower Switch Bank
2 — Instrument Cluster 6 — Power Outlet/Cigar Lighter 10 — Climate Controls
3 — Radio 7 — Storage Bin 11 — Ignition Switch
4 — Glove Compartment 8 — Power Outlet 12 — Storage Bin

INSTRUMENTCLUSTER

24 22 12 1 3 5 2 7 8 9 10 21 16 4 BRAKE ABS SRTB 215° 245 185 13 ESP BAS LEFT REAR DOOR OPEN PRND CRUISE 38.1 mile km/h MPN 20 F E

81c433bc

156UNDERSTANDINGYOURINSTRUMENTPANEL

INSTRUMENTCLUSTERDESCRIPTIONS

1. Speedometer

Indicates vehicle speed.

2. Brake Warning Light

This light monitors various brake functions, including brake fluid level and parking brake application. If the brake light turns on, it may indicate that the parking brake is applied, that the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with the anti-lock brake system reservoir.

If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Program (ESP) system. In this case, the light will remain on until the condition has been corrected. If the problem is related to

the brake booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.

The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has dropped below a specified level.

The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.

NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions. The vehicle should have service performed, and the brake fluid level checked.

If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.

WARNING!

Drivingvehiclewiththeredbrakelightonis dangerous.Partofthebrakesystemmayhavefailed. Itwilltakelongertostopthevehicle.Youcouldhave anaccident.Havethevehiclecheckedimmediately.

Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.

Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON position. The light should illuminate for approximately two seconds. The light should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light inspected by an authorized dealer.

The light also will turn on when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON position.

NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.

3. Turn Signal Indicators

The arrow will flash with the exterior turn signal when the turn signal lever is operated.

If the vehicle electronics sense that the vehicle has traveled about 1 mile (1.6 km) with the turn signals on, a chime will sound to alert you to turn the signals off. If either indicator flashes at a rapid rate, check for a defective outside light bulb.

4. High Beam Indicator

Indicates that headlights are on high beam.

158UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENTPANEL

5. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)

The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of an onboard diagnostic system called OBD II that monitors engine and automatic transmission control systems. The light will illuminate when the key is in the ON position before engine start. If the bulb does not come on when turning the key from OFF to ON, have the condition checked promptly.

Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap, poor fuel quality, etc., may illuminate the light after engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several of your typical driving cycles. In most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing.

CAUTION!

ProlongeddrivingwiththeMILoncouldcause damagetotheenginecontrolsystem.Italsocould affectfueleconomyanddrivability.IftheMILis flashing,severecatalyticconverterdamage and powerlosswillsoonoccur.Immediateserviceis required.

WARNING!

Amalfunctioningcatalyticconverter, as referenced above, can reach higher temperature than innormal operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you drive slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry plants or wood or cardboard, etc. This could result in deathor serious injury to the driver, occupants or others.

6. Airbag Warning Light

This light turns on and remains on for six to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON. If the light is not on during starting, stays on, or turns on while driving, have the system inspected by an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.

7. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Warning Light

This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System. The light will turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and may stay on for as long as four seconds.

If the ABS Warning Light remains on or turns on while driving, it indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is

required. However, the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the Brake Warning Light is not on.

If the ABS Warning Light is on, the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of anti-lock brakes. If the ABS Warning Light does not turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, have the light inspected by an authorized dealer.

8. Tachometer

Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute (RPM).

9. Vehicle Security Light

This light will flash rapidly for approximately 15 seconds when the vehicle theft alarm is arming. The light will flash at a slower speed continuously after the alarm is set. The security

light will also come on for about three seconds when the ignition is first turned on.

160UNDERSTANDINGYOURINSTRUMENTPANEL

10. Oil Pressure Warning Light

This light indicates low engine oil pressure. The light should turn on momentarily when the engine is started. If the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle, and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A continuous chime will sound when this light turns on.

Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine. The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.

11. Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator Light/Traction Control System (TCS) Indicator Light

If this indicator light flashes during acceleration, apply as little throttle as possible. While driving, ease up on the accelerator. Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions, and do not switch off the Electronic Stability Program (ESP), or Traction Control System (TCS).

12. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light

Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly, when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also

reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENTPANEL

approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.

CAUTION!

TheTPMShasbeenoptimizedfortheoriginal equipmenttiresandwheels.TPMSpressuresand warninghavebeenestablishedforthetiresize equippedonyourvehicle.Undesirablesystemoperationorsensordamagemayresultwhenusingreplacementequipmentthatisnotofthesamesize, type,and/orstyle.Aftermarketwheelscancause sensordamage.Donotusetiresealantfromacan,or balancebeadsifyourvehicleisequippedwitha TPMS,asdamagetothesensorsmayresult.

13. Temperature Gauge

The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperature. Any reading within the normal range indicates that the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.

The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher temperature when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades, or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.

CAUTION!

Drivingwithahotenginecoolingsystemcould damageyourvehicle.Ifthetemperaturegaugereads 240°F(116°C)orgreater,pulloverandstopthe vehicle.Idlethevehiclewiththeairconditioner turnedoffuntilthepointerdropsbackinto the normalrange200–230°F(93–110°C).Ifthepointer remainsonthe240°F(116°C)orgreater,andyouhear continuouschimes,turntheengineoffimmediately, andcallanauthorizeddealershipforservice.

WARNING!

Ahotenginecoolingsystemisdangerous. Youor otherscouldbebadlyburnedbysteamorboiling coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer-ship for service if your vehicle overheats. If you decidetolook under the hoody yourself, see "Maintaining Your Vehicle". Follow the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Capparagraph.

14. Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Display

When the appropriate conditions exist, this display shows the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) messages. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center”.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

1. Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Warning Light/Brake Assist System (BAS) Warning Light — If Equipped

ESP BAS

The malfunction light for the Electronic Stabil-

ity Program (ESP) is combined with Brake

Assist System (BAS). The yellow "ESP/BAS

Warning Light" comes on when the ignition

switch is turned to the "ON" position. They should go out with the engine running. If the "ESP/BAS Warning Light" comes on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has been detected in either the ESP or the BAS system. If this light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

164UNDERSTANDINGYOURINSTRUMENTPANEL

WARNING!

Ifawarninglightremainsonthesystemmaynotbe workingandyouwillnothavethebenefitofESPor BAS.Undercertaindrivingconditions,whereESPor BASwouldbebeneficial,you-ifyouhavenot adjustedyourdrivingspeedsandstoppinginorto accountforthelackofthefeature,maybeinaccident.

16. Seat Belt Reminder Light

When the ignition switch is first turned ON, this light will turn on for five to eight seconds as a bulb check. During the bulb check, if the driver's seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound. After the bulb check or when driving, if the driver or front passenger seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Warning Light

will flash or remain on continuously. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.

17. Cruise Indicator

CRUISE This indicator illuminates when the speed control system is turned ON.

18. Odometer

The odometer shows the total distance the vehicle has been driven.

U.S. Federal regulations require that upon transfer of vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven. If your odometer needs to be repaired or serviced, the repair technician should leave the odometer reading the same as it was before the repair or service. If s/he cannot do so, then the odometer must be set at zero, and a sticker must be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was before the repair or service. It is a good idea for you to

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENTPANEL165

make a record of the odometer reading before the repair/service, so that you can be sure that it is properly reset, or that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer must be reset at zero.

19. Shift Lever Indicator

The Shift Lever Indicator is self-contained within the instrument cluster. It displays the gear position of the automatic transmission.

NOTE: You must apply the brakes before shifting from PARK.

20. Fuel Gauge

The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when the ignition switch is in the ON position.

21. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light

This light informs you of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a problem is detected the light will come on

while the engine is running. Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is placed in the PARK position. The light should turn off. If the light remains lit with the engine running, your vehicle will usually be drivable; however, see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible. If the light is flashing when the engine is running, immediate service is required and you may experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing. The light will come on when the ignition is first turned on and remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the light does not come on during starting, have the system checked by an authorized dealer.

22. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped

This indicator will illuminate when the front fog lights are on.

166UNDERSTANDINGYOURINSTRUMENTPANEL

23. Charging System Light

This light shows the status of the electrical charging system. The light should come on when the ignition switch is first turned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the light stays on or comes on while driving, turn off some of the vehicle's non-essential electrical devices or increase engine speed (if at idle). If the charging system light remains on, it means that the vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an authorized dealer.

If jump starting is required, refer to "Jump Starting Procedures" in "What To Do In Emergencies".

24. Low Fuel Warning Light

When the fuel level reaches approximately 2.3 U.S. Gallons (8.7 Liters) this light will come on and remain on until fuel is added. The Low Fuel

Warning Light may turn on and off again, especially during and after hard braking, accelerations, or turns. This occurs due to the shifting of the fuel in the tank.

ELECTRONICVEHICLEINFORMATIONCENTER (EVIC)

The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) features a driver-interactive display that is located in the instrument cluster.

60% 120 140 160 180 20 MPN SRTB 7 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1000 1100 1200 1300 1400 1500 1600 1700 1800 1900 2000 2100 2200 2300 2400 2500 2600 2700 2800 2900 3000 3100 3200 3300 3400 3500 3600 3700 3800 3900 4000 4100 4200 4300 4400 4500 4600 4700 4800 4900 5000 5100 5200 5300 5400 5500 5600 5700 5800 5900 6000 617682c6

ElectronicVehicleInformationCenter

The EVIC consists of the following:

• System Status
  • Vehicle Information Warning Message Displays
  • Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)
• Compass Display
  • Outside Temperature Display
• Trip Computer Functions
• Surround Sound Modes (If Equipped with Driver-Selectable Surround [DSS])
  • Performance Pages (if equipped)

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 167

The system allows the driver to select information by pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering wheel:

MENU Button

Press and release the MENU button and the mode displayed will change between Trip Functions, Personal Settings, and System Status.

FUNCTION SELECT Button

Press the FUNCTION SELECT button to select the displayed function (YES (Y) or NO (N).

SCROLL Button

Press the SCROLL button to scroll through Trip Functions, Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features), and System Status Messages.

168UNDERSTANDINGYOURINSTRUMENTPANEL

COMPASS/TEMPERATURE Button

Press and release the COMPASS/ TEMPERATURE button to display one of eight compass readings and the outside temperature.

ElectronicVehicleInformationCenter(EVIC) Displays

When the appropriate conditions exist, the EVIC displays the following messages:

• TURN SIGNAL ON
  • PERFORM SERVICE
• DAMAGED KEY — KEY DOES NOT COMMUNICATE
• KEY NOT PROGRAMMED — KEY NOT PROGRAMMED

• WRONG KEY — KEY DOES NOT BELONG TO VEHICLE

• KEY NOT PROGRAMMED — EXCEEDED KEY PROGRAM LIMIT

• PROGRAMMING ACTIVE — NEW KEY PROGRAMMED
  • SERVICE SECURITY KEY
• DRIVER/PASSENGER DOOR OPEN (with graphic)
  • LEFT/RIGHT REAR DOOR OPEN (with graphic)
  • X DOORS OPEN (with graphic)
  • LIFTGATE OPEN (with graphic)
• LIFTGATE/DOOR OPEN (with graphic)
  • LIFTGATE/DOORS OPEN (with graphic)
  • LIFTGLASS OPEN (with graphic)
  • HOOD OPEN (with graphic)
  • HOOD/DOOR OPEN (with graphic)

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 169

• HOOD/DOORS OPEN (with graphic)
• LIFTGATE/HOOD OPEN (with graphic)
• HOOD/GLASS/DOOR OPEN (with graphic)
• HOOD/GLASS/DOORS OPEN (with graphic)
• HOOD/GATE/DOOR OPEN (with graphic)
• HOOD/GATE/DOORS OPEN (with graphic)
- LIFTGLASS/DOOR OPEN (with graphic)
- LIFTGLASS/DOORS OPEN (with graphic)
• LIFTGLASS/HOOD OPEN (with graphic)
• WASHER FLUID LOW (with graphic)
• COOLANT LOW (with graphic)
- UPSHIFT (with graphic)
- CHECK GAUGES

• AUTO HIGH BEAMS ON
• AUTO HIGH BEAMS OFF
• PARK ASSIST DISABLED
• SERVICE SUSPENSION
• SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM
• TRANSMISSION OVER TEMP
- LOW BRAKE FLUID LEVEL
- WARNING! LIMIT SPEED
- CHECK GASCAP
- ESP OFF
- IOD FUSE OUT
- MEMORY #1 POSITIONS SET
- MEMORY #2 POSITIONS SET

170UNDERSTANDINGYOURINSTRUMENTPANEL

• MEMORY SYSTEM DISABLED — SEATBELT BUCKLED (with graphic)
• MEMORY SYSTEM DISABLED — VEHICLE NOT IN PARK
• DRIVER 1 MEMORY
• DRIVER 2 MEMORY
• ADJ. PEDALS DISABLED — CRUISE CONTROL SET
• ADJ. PEDALS DISABLED — SHIFTER IN REVERSE
• TIRE LOW PRESSURE
• CHECK TPM SYSTEM
• LEFT FRONT LOW PRESSURE (Premium TPM System Only)

• RIGHT FRONT LOW PRESSURE (Premium TPM System Only)

• LEFT REAR LOW PRESSURE (Premium TPM System Only)

• RIGHT REAR LOW PRESSURE (Premium TPM System Only)
• Stereo (if equipped with Driver-Selectable Surround Sound [DSS])
• Video Surround (if equipped with Driver-Selectable Surround Sound [DSS])
• Audio Surround (if equipped with Driver-Selectable Surround Sound [DSS])
• 0-60 mph (0-100 km/h) (if equipped with Performance Pages)
• Braking Distance (if equipped with Performance Pages)
  • 1/8 Mile (if equipped with Performance Pages)

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 171

• 1/4 Mile (if equipped with Performance Pages)
- Instantaneous G-Force (if equipped with Performance Pages)
- Peak G-Force (if equipped with Performance Pages)
- RKE BATTERY LOW
• VEHICLE NOT IN PARK
- IGNITION POSITION
- PRESS BRAKE TO START
- INSERT KEY
- TURN TO ON

TripFunctions

Press and release the MENU button until one of the following Trip Functions displays in the EVIC:

- Distance To Empty

• Trip A
• Trip B
• Elapsed Time
• Service Distance
• Engine Oil Pressure
  • Engine Oil Temperature

• Display Units of Measure In

Press the SCROLL button to cycle through all the Trip Computer functions.

The Trip Functions mode displays the following information:

• Distance To Empty (DTE)

Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous

172UNDERSTANDINGYOURINSTRUMENTPANEL

and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel tank level. DTE cannot be reset through the FUNCTION SELECT button.

NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of the vehicle, regardless of the DTE displayed value.

When the DTE value is less than 30 miles (48 km) estimated driving distance, the DTE display will change to a "LOW FUEL" message. This display will continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding a significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the "LOW FUEL" message and a new DTE value will display.

- Trip A

Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last reset.

- Trip B

Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last reset.

- Elapsed Time

Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset when the ignition switch is in the ACC position. Elapsed time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON or START position.

• Engine Oil Pressure

Shows the current engine oil pressure. The scale will read from 0–100 psi (0–689 kPa).

• Engine Oil Temperature

Shows the current engine oil temperature. The scale will read from 140^-300^ ( 60^-149^ ).

• Display Units of Measure In

To make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until "ENGLISH" or "METRIC" appears.

ToResetTheDisplay

Reset will only occur while a resettable function is being displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button once to clear the resettable function being displayed. To reset all resettable functions, press and hold the FUNCTION SELECT button for two seconds. Current display will reset along with other functions.

PerformancePages—IfEquipped

WARNING!

MeasurementofvehiclestatisticswiththePerformancePagesisintendedforoff-highwayoroff-road useonlyandshouldnotbedoneonanypublic roadways.Itisrecommendedthatthesefeaturesbe usedinacontrolledenvironmentandwithinthe limitsofthelaw.Thecapabilitiesofthevehicleas measuredbytheperformancepagesmustneverbe exploitedinarecklessordangerousmanner,which canjeopardizetheuser'ssafetyorthesafetyof others.Onlyasafe,attentive,andskillfuldrivercan preventaccidents.

174UNDERSTANDINGYOURINSTRUMENTPANEL

The Performance Pages include the following features:

• 0-60 mph (0-100 km/h)
• Braking Distance
  • 1/8 Mile
  • 1/4 Mile
• Instantaneous G-Force
• Peak G-Force

To access, press and release the MENU button until Performance Pages displays in the EVIC. Press the SCROLL button to cycle through the features. Press the FUNCTION SELECT button to select a feature.

The following describes each feature and its operation:

0-60mph(0-100km/h)

When selected, this screen displays the time it takes for the vehicle to go from 0 to 60 mph (0 to 100 km/h) within 10 seconds.

• The feature will "ready" when the vehicle speed is at 0 mph (0 km/h). The word "READY" will flash when conditions are met for the event to begin.
• Dashes will display if the vehicle fails to reach 60 mph (100 km/h) in less than 10 seconds.
• The time will continue to display until the FUNCTION SELECT button is pressed.
• Pressing the FUNCTION SELECT button will clear the current run time and display the vehicle's best 0-60 mph (0-100 km/h) time.

- To clear the vehicle's best 0-60 mph (0-100 km/h) time, press and hold the FUNCTION SELECT button for five seconds.

BrakingDistance

When selected, this screen displays the vehicle's braking distance and the speed at which the brake pedal was pressed.

• This feature will only function when applying the brakes at speeds above 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Engaging the parking brake will disable this feature.
• The word "READY" will flash when conditions are met for the event to begin.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 175

• The distance and speed measurements display while the event is taking place.
• The distance measurement will be aborted if the brake pedal is released before the vehicle comes to a complete stop.
• The distance and speed measurements will continue to display until the FUNCTION SELECT button is pressed.
• Pressing the FUNCTION SELECT button will clear the current run and prepare the cluster to record a new run.

176UNDERSTANDINGYOURINSTRUMENTPANEL

1/8Mile, 1/4Mile

When selected, this screen displays the time it takes the vehicle to travel 1/8 mile (1/4 mile) within 30 seconds and the vehicle's speed when it reaches 1/8 mile (1/4 mile).

• The feature will "ready" when the vehicle is at 0 mph (0 km/h). The word "READY" will flash when conditions are met for the event to begin.
• Dashes will display if the vehicle fails to reach 1/8 mile (1/4 mile) in less than 30 seconds.
• The time and speed will continue to display until the FUNCTION SELECT button is pressed.
• Pressing the FUNCTION SELECT button will clear the current run and display the vehicle's best 1/8 mile (1/4 mile) run.

- To clear the vehicle's best 1/8 mile (1/4 mile) run, press and hold the FUNCTION SELECT button for five seconds.

InstantaneousG-Force

When selected, this screen displays the current G-Force (longitudinal and lateral) along with a friction circle that displays the directions of the forces.

PeakG-Force

When selected, this screen displays all four G-force values (two longitudinal and two lateral).

• When a force greater than zero is measured, the display will update the value as it climbs. As the G-Force falls, the peak forces will continue to display.
• Pressing the FUNCTION SELECT button will clear the peak force values.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 177

CompassDisplay

COMPASS Button

The compass readings indicate the direction the vehicle is facing. Press and release the COMPASS/TEMPERATURE button to display one of eight compass readings and the outside temperature.

NOTE: The system will display the last known outside temperature when starting the vehicle and may need to be driven several minutes before the updated temperature is displayed. Engine temperature can also affect the displayed temperature, therefore temperature readings are not updated when the vehicle is not moving.

AutomaticCompassCalibration

When the vehicle is new, the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will display "CAL" until the compass is calibrated. To complete the calibration process, drive slowly (5 mph/ 8 km/h) in one or more complete circles in an area, free from magnetic material until the CAL indicator displayed in the EVIC turns off. The Compass will now function normally.

ManualCompassCalibration

If the compass appears erratic and the "CAL" indicator does not appear in the EVIC display, you must put the compass into the Calibration Mode manually as follows:

1. Turn on the ignition switch.
2. Press the MENU button until Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features) menu is reached.
3. Press the SCROLL button until "Calibrate Compass" is displayed in the EVIC.
4. Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button to start the calibration. The "CAL" indicator will be displayed in the EVIC.

178UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENTPANEL

1. Complete one or more 360-degree turns (in an area free from large metal or metallic objects) until the "CAL" indicator turns off. The compass will now function normally.

CompassVariance

Compass Variance is the difference between magnetic North and Geographic North. In some areas of the country, the difference between magnetic and Geographic North is great enough to cause the compass to give false readings. For the most accurate compass performance, the compass variance must be set using the following procedure:

NOTE: Magnetic materials should be kept away from the Overhead console. This is where the compass sensor is located.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 040506040 CompassVarianceMap

1. Turn the ignition switch ON.
2. Press the MENU button until Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features) menu is reached.

3. Press the SCROLL button until "Compass Variance" is displayed in the EVIC.

4. Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button to change the variance number. Continue until desired number is reached.

5. Press either MENU, SCROLL, or COMPASS/TEMP button to set the value and exit.

Driver-SelectableSurroundSound(DSS)-If Equipped

Press and release the MENU button until "Surround Sound" displays in the EVIC. The EVIC provides information on the current surround mode.

• Stereo
• Audio Surround

While in the Surround Sound menu, press the FUNCTION SELECT button to change surround modes.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 179

PersonalSettings(Customer-Programmable Features)

Personal Settings allows the driver to set and recall features when the transmission is in PARK.

Press and release the MENU button until "Personal Settings" displays in the EVIC.

Use the SCROLL button to display one of the following choices:

Language

When in this display, you may select one of three languages for all display nomenclature, including the trip functions and the Uconnect™ gps (if equipped). Press the FUNCTION SELECT button while in this display to select English, Espanol, or Francais. Then, as you continue, the information will display in the selected language.

NOTE: The EVIC will not change the Uconnect™ language selection. Please refer to "Language Selection" in Uconnect™ Phone for details.

AutoDoorLocks

When YES (Y) is selected, all of the doors will lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph (24 km/h). To make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until YES (Y) or NO (N) appears.

AutoUnlockOnExit

When YES (Y) is selected, all of the doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped, and the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver's door is opened. To make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until YES (Y) or NO (N) appears.

RemoteKeyUnlock

When “Driver Door 1st Press” is selected, only the driver’s door will unlock on the first press of the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter UNLOCK button. When “Driver Door 1st Press” is selected, you must press the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passenger’s doors. When “All Doors 1st Press” is selected, all of the doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button. To make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until “Driver Door 1st Press” or “All Doors 1st Press” appears.

SoundHornwithLock

When YES (Y) is selected, a short horn sound will occur when the RKE transmitter LOCK button is pressed. This feature may be selected with or without the "Flash Lamps with Lock" feature. To make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until YES (Y) or NO (N) appears.

FlashLampswithLock

When YES (Y) is selected, the front and rear turn signals will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmitter. This feature may be selected with or without the "Sound Horn with Lock" feature. To make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until YES (Y) or NO (N) appears.

HeadlampOffDelay

When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until "0," "30," "60," or "90" appears.

AutoHighBeams(AvailablewithSmartBeam™ Only)

When this feature is selected, the high beam headlights will deactivate automatically under certain conditions. To make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until YES (Y) or NO (N) appears. Refer to "Lights/SmartBeam™ — If Equipped" in "Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle" for further information.

HeadlampsOnwithWipers(Availablewith AutomaticHeadlampsOnly)

When YES (Y) is selected, and the headlight switch is in the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on. The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature. To make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until YES (Y) or NO (N) appears.

NOTE: Turning the headlights on during the daytime causes the instrument panel lights to dim. To increase the brightness, refer to “Lights” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”.

182UNDERSTANDINGYOURINSTRUMENTPANEL

RainSensingWipers—IfEquipped

When YES (Y) is selected, the system will automatically activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture on the windshield. To make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until YES (Y) or NO (N) appears. When NO (N) is selected, the system reverts to the standard intermittent wiper operation.

ServiceInterval

When this feature is selected, a service interval between 2,000 miles (3 200 km) and 6,000 miles (10 000 km) in 500 miles (800 km) increments may be selected. Pressing the STEP button when in this display will select distances between 2,000 miles (3 200 km) and 6,000 miles (10 000 km) in 500 miles (800 km) increments.

ResetServiceDistance(DisplaysWithIfService IntervalwasChanged)

When this feature is selected, the current accumulated service distance can be reset to the newly selected service interval. Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until YES (Y) or NO (N) appears.

EasyEntry/ExitSeat(AvailablewithMemorySeat Only)

This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until YES (Y) or NO (N) appears.

NOTE: The seat will return to the memorized seat location (if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set to ON) when the RKE transmitter is used to unlock the door. Refer to "Driver Memory Seat" in "Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle" for further information.

KeyOffPowerDelay

When this feature is selected, the power window switches, radio, Uconnect™ Phone (if equipped), DVD video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned off. Opening a vehicle door will cancel this feature. To make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until "Off," "45 sec.," "5 min.," or "10 min." appears.

Illuminated Approach

When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter. To make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until "OFF," "30 sec.," "60 sec.," or "90 sec." appears.

DisplayUnitsofMeasureIn:

The EVIC, odometer, and Uconnect™ gps (if equipped) can be changed between English and Metric units of measure. To make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until “ENGLISH” or “METRIC” appears.

SystemStatus

Press and release the MENU button until one of the following System Status messages displays in the EVIC:

• System OK
• System Warnings Displayed (will display all currently active System Warnings)

184UNDERSTANDINGYOURINSTRUMENTPANEL

- Tire Pressure Monitor System (shows the current pressure of all four road tires). For additional information, refer to "Tire Pressure Monitor System" in "Starting And Operating".

SRT8 x 1600 RPM TIRE 31 34 PSI 37 32 215° 185 245 81771/4b

TirePressureDisplay

NOTE:

- Tires heat up during normal driving conditions. Heat will cause the tire pressure to increase from 2 to 6 psi (14 to 41 kPa) during normal driving conditions. Refer to "Tires-General Information/Tire Inflation Pressures" in "Starting And Operating" for additional information.

- Your system can be set to display pressure units in PSI, kPa, or BAR.

MEDIACENTER730N/430(RER/REN/RBZ)—AM/FMSTEREORADIOANDCD/DVD/HDD/NAV—IFEQUIPPED

NOTE: The sales code is located on the lower right side of the unit's faceplate.

The REN, RER and RBZ radios contain a CD/DVD player, USB port, and a 30-gigabyte hard drive (HDD). Sirius Satellite Radio is optional. The 6.5 in (16.5 cm) touch screen allows for easy menu selection.

The RER radio also contains a Global Positioning System (GPS)-based Navigation system.

Refer to your Uconnect™ Multimedia REN, RER or RBZ user's manual for detailed operating instructions.

OperatingInstructions—VoiceCommand System—IfEquipped

Refer to "Voice Command" in the Uconnect™ User Manual located on the DVD for further details.

OperatingInstructions—Uconnect™Phone—If Equipped

Refer to "Uconnect™ Phone" in the Uconnect™ User Manual located on the DVD for further details.

ClockSettingProcedure—RBZRadio

ToManuallySettheClock

1. Turn on the radio.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed, the clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
3. To move the hour forward, touch the screen where the word "Hour" with the arrow pointing upward is displayed. To move the hour backward, touch the screen where the word "Hour" with the arrow pointing downward is displayed.
4. To move the minute forward, touch the screen where the word "Min" with the arrow pointing upward is displayed. To move the minute backward, touch the screen where the word "Min" with the arrow pointing downward is displayed.
5. To save the new time setting, touch the screen where the word "Save" is displayed.

186UNDERSTANDINGYOURINSTRUMENTPANEL

ChangingDaylightSavingsTime

When selected, this feature will display the time of day in daylight savings time. Proceed as follows to change the current setting:

1. Turn on the radio.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
3. When this feature is on, a check mark will appear in the box next to the words "Daylight Savings." Touch the screen where the words "Daylight Savings" are displayed to change the current setting.

ShowTimeifRadioisOff

When selected, this feature will display the time of day on the touch screen when the radio is turned off. Proceed as follows to change the current setting:

1. Turn on the radio.

2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The clock setting menu will appear on the screen.

3. When this feature is on, a check mark will appear in the box next to the words "Show Time if Radio is Off." Touch the screen where the words "Show Time if Radio is Off" are displayed to change the current setting.

ChangingtheTimeZone

1. Turn on the radio.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
3. Touch the screen where the words "Set Time Zone" are displayed. The time zone selection menu will appear on the screen.

4. Select a time zone by touching the screen where your selection appears. If you do not see a time zone that you want to select, touch the screen where the word "Page" is displayed to view additional time zones in the menu.

5. Touch the screen where the word "Save" is displayed.

ClockSettingProcedure—RER/RENRadio

Uconnect ^® gps—REROnly

The GPS receiver used in this system is synchronized to the time data being transmitted by the GPS satellite. The satellite clock is Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). This is the worldwide standard for time. This makes the system's clock very accurate once the appropriate time zone and daylight savings information is set.

ToManuallySettheClock—RER/REN

1. Turn on the radio.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed.
3. Touch the screen where "User Clock" is displayed, the clock setting menu will appear on the screen.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 187

1. To move the hour forward, touch the screen where the word "Hour" with the arrow pointing upward is displayed. To move the hour backward, touch the screen where the word "Hour" with the arrow pointing downward is displayed.
2. To move the minute forward, touch the screen where the word "Min" with the arrow pointing upward is displayed. To move the minute backward, touch the screen where the word "Min" with the arrow pointing downward is displayed.
3. To save the new time setting, touch the screen where the word "Save" is displayed.

ChangingDaylightSavingsTime

When selected, this feature will display the time of day in daylight savings time. Proceed as follows to change the current setting:

1. Turn on the radio.

188UNDERSTANDINGYOURINSTRUMENTPANEL

1. Touch the screen where "User Clock" is displayed, the clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
2. When this feature is on, a check mark will appear in the box next to the words "Daylight Savings." Touch the screen where the words "Daylight Savings" are displayed to change the current setting.

ShowTimeifRadioisOff

When selected, this feature will display the time of day on the touch screen when the radio is turned off. Proceed as follows to change the current setting:

1. Turn on the radio.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed.
3. Touch the screen where "User Clock" is displayed, the clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
4. When this feature is on, a check mark will appear in the box next to the words "Show Time if Radio is Off."

Touch the screen where the words "Show Time if Radio is Off" are displayed to change the current setting.

ChangingtheTimeZone

1. Turn on the radio.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed.
3. Touch the screen where "User Clock" is displayed, the clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
4. Touch the screen where the words "Set Time Zone" are displayed. The time zone selection menu will appear on the screen.
5. Select a time zone by touching the screen where your selection appears. If you do not see a time zone that you want to select, touch the screen where the word "Page" is displayed to view additional time zones in the menu.
6. Touch the screen where the word "Save" is displayed.

MEDIACENTER130(RES)—AM/FMSTEREO RADIOWITHCDPLAYER(MP3AUXJACK)

NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of the radio faceplate.

SEIX SEEK AM/FM DISC AUX RW IF TIME SINGLE DISC MP3 PUSH ON VOLUME 1 2 3 4 5 6 SET RND PUSH AUDIO/SELECT TUNE/SCRILL AUD NO

042305232

RESRadio

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 189

OperatingInstructions—RadioMode

NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio.

PowerSwitch/VolumeControl(Rotary)

Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio.

ElectronicVolumeControl

The electronic volume control turns continuously (360 degrees) in either direction, without stopping. Turning the ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume, and to the left decreases it.

When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played.

190UNDERSTANDINGYOURINSTRUMENTPANEL

SEEKButtons

Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection. Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping, until you release it.

TIMEButton

Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time and radio frequency.

ClockSettingProcedure

1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/SCROLL control knob.

3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes will begin to blink.

4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to save time change.

5. To exit, press any button/knob, or wait five seconds.

RW/FF

Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either AM or FM frequencies.

TUNEControl

Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.

SettingtheTone,Balance,andFade

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 191

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid-range tones.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to exit setting tone, balance, and fade.

AM/FMButton

Press the buttons to select either AM or FM mode.

SET/RNDButton—ToSetthePushbutton Memory

When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window. Select the button (1 to 6) you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button. If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET/RND button, the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory.

You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and

192UNDERSTANDINGYOURINSTRUMENTPANEL

SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory. The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice.

Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding button number will display.

Buttons 1 - 6

These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM stations).

DISCButton

Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from AM/FM modes to Disc modes.

OperationInstructions—CDMODEForCDAndMP3AudioPlay

NOTE:

• The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio.
• This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD), recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.

InsertingCompactDisc(s)

Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than 1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be ejected before a new disc can be loaded.

If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will show the track number, and index time in minutes and seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.

CAUTION!

• ThisCDplayerwillaccept4-3/4in(12cm)discs only. Theuseofothersizeddiscsmaydamagethe CDplayermechanism.
• Donotuseadhesivelabels.Theselabelscanpeel awayandjamtheplayermechanism.
• RESisasingleCDplayer.Donotattempttoinsert asecondCDifoneisalreadyloaded.
• Dual-mediadistypes(onesideisaDVD,the othersideisaCD)shouldnotbeused,andthey cancausedamagetotheplayer.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 193

EJECTButton-EjectingaCD

Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.

If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed, the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.

A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.

NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).

SEEKButton

Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of

194UNDERSTANDINGYOURINSTRUMENTPANEL

the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in CD and MP3 modes.

TIMEButton

Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display.

RW/FF

Press and hold the FF (Fast Forward) button and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released, or RW or another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button works in a similar manner.

AM/FMButton

Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.

SET/RNDButton(RandomPlayButton)

Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace.

Press the right SEEK button to move to the next randomly selected track.

Press the RND button a second time to stop Random Play.

NotesonPlayingMP3Files

The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited. When writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restrictions.

SupportedMedia(DiscTypes)

The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 195

SupportedMediumFormats(FileSystems)

The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.

When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file normally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.

The radio uses the following limits for file systems:

• Maximum number of folder levels: 8
• Maximum number of files: 255
- Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file names and folder names is limited. For large numbers of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to display the file name and folder name, and will assign a number instead. With a maximum number of files,

exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With 200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this display.)

• Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:

• Level 1: 12 (including a separator "." and a three-character extension)
• Level 2: 31 (including a separator "." and a three-character extension)

Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio. Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files). Discs created with an option such as "keep disc open after writing" are most likely multisession discs. The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times.

196 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

SupportedMP3FileFormats

The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 extension as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3 extension may cause playback problems. The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file.

When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported. In addition, variable bit rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or VBR bit rate.

MPEG Specification	Sampling Frequency(kHz)	BitRate(kbps)
MPEG-1 Audio Layer 3	48, 44.1, 32	320, 256, 224, 192, 160, 128, 112, 96, 80, 64, 56, 48, 40, 32
MPEG-2 Audio Layer 3	24, 22.05, 16	160, 128, 144, 112, 96, 80, 64, 56, 48, 40, 32, 24, 16, 8

ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios.

Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not supported.

PlaybackofMP3Files

When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files.

Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following:

• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than CD-R media
- Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer to load than non-multisession discs
- Number of files and folders - Loading times will increase with more files and folders

To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option before writing to the disc.

OperationInstructions-AuxiliaryMode

The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, which allows the user to plug in a portable device, such as an MP3 player, or cassette player, and utilize the vehicle's audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers.

Pressing the DISC/AUX button will change the mode to auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected.

NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the device's volume set to proper level. If the AUX audio is not loud enough, turn the device's volume up. If the AUX audio sounds distorted, turn the device's volume down.

TIMEButton(AuxiliaryMode)

Press this button to change the display to time of day. The time of day will display for five seconds (when ignition is OFF).

198UNDERSTANDINGYOURINSTRUMENTPANEL

MEDIACENTER130(RES/RSC)—AM/FM STEREORADIOWITHCDPLAYER(MP3AUX JACK)ANDSIRIUSRADIO

NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of the radio faceplate.

IMSEEK SEEKM INFO RW FF TIME SINGLE DISC MP3 PUSH ON AM/FM SAT DISC AUX SINUS% LIST MUSIC TYPE SETUP PUSH AUDIO/(SELLIC) VOLUME 1 2 3 4 5 6 SET END AUTO

042305233

RES/RSCRadio

OperatingInstructions—RadioMode

NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio.

PowerSwitch/VolumeControl(Rotary)

Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio.

ElectronicVolumeControl

The electronic volume control turns continuously (360 degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it.

When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 199

SEEK Buttons

Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection. Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it.

Voice Command System (Radio) — If Equipped Refer to "Voice Command" in the Uconnect™ User Manual located on the DVD for further details.

Voice Command Button Uconnect™ Phone — If Equipped

Press this button to operate the Uconnect™ Phone feature (if equipped). Refer to "Voice Command" in the Uconnect™ User Manual located on the DVD for further details.

If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle, a "Not Equipped With Uconnect" message will display on the radio screen.

Phone Button Uconnect™ Phone — If Equipped Press this button to operate the Uconnect™ Phone feature (if equipped). Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in the Uconnect™ User Manual located on the DVD for further details.

If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle, a "Not Equipped With Uconnect" message will display on the radio screen.

TIME Button

Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time and radio frequency.

Clock Setting Procedure

1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.

200UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENTPANEL

1. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/SCROLL control knob.
2. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes will begin to blink.
3. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to save time change.
4. To exit, press any button/knob or wait five seconds.
   The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button. For vehicles equipped with satellite radio, press the SETUP button, use the TUNE/SCROLL control to select SET CLOCK, and then follow the above procedure, starting at Step 2. For vehicles not equipped with satellite radio, press the SETUP button and then follow the above procedure, starting at Step 2.

INFOButton

Press the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only).

RW/FF

Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either AM or FM frequencies.

TUNEControl

Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.

SettingtheTone,Balance,andFade

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 201

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid-range tones.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to exit setting tone, balance, and fade.

MUSICTYPEButton

Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be selected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast Music Type information.

Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following format types:

ProgramType	16-DigitCharacter Display
No program type or undefined	None
Adult Hits Adlt Hit
Classical Classicl
Classic Rock Cls Rock
College College
Country Country
Foreign Language Language
Information Inform
Jazz Jazz
News News
Nostalgia Nostalga
Oldies Oldies
Personality Persnity
Public Public
Rhythm and Blues R & B
Religious Music Rel Musc
Religious Talk Rel Talk
Rock	Rock

ProgramType	16-DigitCharacter Display
Soft	Soft
Soft Rock	Soft Rck
Soft Rhythm and Blues	Soft R&B
Sports	Sports
Talk	Talk
Top 40	Top 40
Weather	Weather

By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon is displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency station with the same selected Music Type name. The Music Type function only operates when in the FM mode.

If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type (Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset station.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 203

SETUPButton

Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between the following items:

- SetClock—Pressing the SELECT button will allow you to set the clock. Adjust the hours by turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. After adjusting the hours, press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes will begin to blink. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to save time change.

AM/FMButton

Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.

SET/RNDButton—ToSetthePushbutton Memory

When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display

window. Select the button (1–6) you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button. If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET/RND button, the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory.

You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory. The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice.

Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding button number will display.

204UNDERSTANDINGYOURINSTRUMENTPANEL

Buttons 1 - 6

These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM stations).

DISC/AUXButton

Pressing the DISC/AUX button will allow you to switch from AM/FM modes to DISC/AUX mode.

OperationInstructions—CDMODEforCDand MP3AudioPlay

NOTE:

• The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio.
• This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD), recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.

InsertingCompactDisc(s)

Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than 1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be ejected before a new disc can be loaded.

If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will show the track number, and index time in minutes and seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.

CAUTION!

- ThisCDplayerwillaccept4–3/4in(12cm)discs only. Theuseofothersizeddiscsmaydamagethe CDplayermechanism.

(Continued)

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 205

CAUTION!(Continued)

• Donotuseadhesivelabels.Theselabelscanpeel awayandjamtheplayermechanism.
• RESisasingleCDplayer.Donotattempttoinsert asecondCDifoneisalreadyloaded.
• Dual-mediadisctypes(onesideisaDVD,the othersideisaCD)shouldnotbeused,andthey cancausedamagetotheplayer.

EJECTButton-EjectingaCD

Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.

If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed, the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.

A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.

NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).

SEEKButton

Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in CD and MP3 modes.

TIMEButton

Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display.

RW/FF

Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button works in a similar manner.

206UNDERSTANDINGYOURINSTRUMENTPANEL

AM/FMButton

Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.

SET/RNDButton(RandomPlayButton)

Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace.

Press the right SEEK button to move to the next randomly selected track.

Press the SET/RND button a second time to stop Random Play.

NotesOnPlayingMP3Files

The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited. When writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restrictions.

SupportedMedia(DiscTypes)

The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.

SupportedMediumFormats(FileSystems)

The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension. When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file normally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.

The radio uses the following limits for file systems:

• Maximum number of folder levels: 8
• Maximum number of files: 255

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 207

• Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file names and folder names is limited. For large numbers of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to display the file name and folder name and will assign a number instead. With a maximum number of files, exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With 200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this display.)
  • Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:

• Level 1: 12 (including a separator "." and a three-character extension)

• Level 2: 31 (including a separator "." and a three-character extension)

Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio. Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files). Discs created with an option such as "keep disc open after writing"are most likely multisession discs. The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times.

SupportedMP3FileFormats

The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 extension as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3 extension may cause playback problems. The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file.

When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported. In addition, variable bit rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or VBR bit rates.

208UNDERSTANDINGYOURINSTRUMENTPANEL

MPEG Specification	Sampling Frequency(kHz)	BitRate(kbps)
MPEG-1 Audio Layer 3	48, 44.1, 32	320, 256, 224, 192, 160, 128, 112, 96, 80, 64, 56, 48, 40, 32
MPEG-2 Audio Layer 3	24, 22.05, 16	160, 128, 144, 112, 96, 80, 64, 56, 48, 40, 32, 24, 16, 8

ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios.

Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not supported.

PlaybackofMP3Files

When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files.

Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following:

• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than CD-R media
- Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer to load than non-multisession discs
- Number of files and folders - Loading times will increase with more files and folders

To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option before writing to the disc.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 209

LISTButton(CDModeforMP3Play)

Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Selecting a folder by pressing the TUNE/SCROLL control knob will begin playing the files contained in that folder (or the next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain playable files).

The folder list will time out after five seconds.

INFOButton(CDModeforMP3Play)

Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File Name, and Folder Name (if available).

Press the INFO button once more to return to "elapsed time" priority mode.

Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or more and the radio will display song titles for each file.

Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds to return to "elapsed time" display.

OperationInstructions-AuxiliaryMode

The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle's audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers.

Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected.

NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the device's volume set to the proper level. If the AUX audio is not loud enough, turn the device's volume up. If the AUX audio sounds distorted, turn the device's volume down.

210 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

TIMEButton(AuxiliaryMode)

Press this button to change the display to time of day. The time of day will display for five seconds (when the ignition is OFF).

OperatingInstructions-Uconnect™Phone(If Equipped)

Refer to "Uconnect™ Phone" in the Uconnect™ User Manual located on the DVD for further details.

OperatingInstructions-Uconnect™Multimedia (SatelliteRadio)(IfEquipped)

Refer to "Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite Radio)" in the Uconnect™ User Manual located on the DVD for further details.

UNIVERSALCONSUMERINTERFACE(UCI)—IF EQUIPPED

NOTE: This section is for sales code RES and REQ/REL/RET radios only with uconnect™. For sales code RER, RBZ, REN, REP, REW, RB2 or REZ touch-screen radio UCI feature, refer to the separate RER, REN, RBZ, RB2 or REZ User's Manual. UCI is available only if equipped as an option with these radios.

This feature allows you to plug an iPod® into the vehicle's sound system through a 16-pin connector, using the provided interface cable.

UCI supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod® and iPhone® devices. Some iPod® software versions may not fully support the UCI features. Please visit Apple's website for software updates.

NOTE:

- If the radio has a USB port, connecting an iPod ^ to this port does not play the media. For playing an iPod ^ , use the separate 16-pin connector port (in the glove compartment on some vehicles).

- Connecting an iPod® to the AUX port located in the radio faceplate, plays media, but does not use the UCI feature to control the connected device.

ConnectingTheiPod®

Use the provided connection cable to connect an iPod ^ to the vehicle's 16-pin connector port (which is located in the glove compartment on some vehicles). Once the iPod ^ is connected and synchronized to the vehicle's UCI system (iPod ^ may take a few seconds to connect), the iPod ^ starts charging and is ready for use by pressing radio switches, as described below.

NOTE:

- You may have to remove the connector pin protection cap from the 16-pin connector port, prior to connecting the cable.

UNDERSTANDING YOURINSTRUMENT PANEL211

- If the iPod® battery is completely discharged, it may not communicate with the UCI system until a minimum charge is attained. Leaving the iPod® connected to the UCI system may charge it to the required level.

UsingThisFeature

By using the provided connection cable to connect an iPod® to the vehicle's UCI 16-pin connector port:

• The iPod® audio can be played on the vehicle's sound system, providing metadata (artist, track title, album, etc.) information on the radio display.
• The iPod ^ can be controlled using the radio buttons to Play, Browse, and List the iPod ^ contents.
• The iPod® battery charges when plugged into the UCI connector (if supported by the specific iPod® device)

ControllingTheiPod®UsingRadioButtons

To get into the UCI (iPod®) mode and access a connected iPod®, press the "AUX" button on the radio faceplate.

212 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Once in the UCI (iPod®) mode, iPod® audio tracks (if available from iPod®) start playing over the vehicle's audio system.

PlayMode

When switched to UCI mode, the iPod® automatically starts Play mode. In Play mode, you may use the following buttons on the radio faceplate to control the iPod® and display data:

• Use the TUNE control knob to select the next or previous track.
• Turning it clockwise (forward) by one click, while playing a track, skips to the next track.

• Turning it counterclockwise (backward) by one click, during the first two seconds of the track, will jump to the previous track in the list. Turning this button at any other time in the track, will jump to the beginning of the current track.

• Jump backward in the current track by pressing and holding the << RWbutton. Holding the << RW button long enough will take you to the beginning of the current track.

• Jump forward in the current track by pressing and holding the FF>> button.
• A single press backward << RW or forward FF >> will jump backward or forward respectively, for five seconds.

• Use the << SEEK and SEEK >> buttons to jump to the previous or next track. If the << SEEKbutton is pressed during the first two seconds of the track, it will jump to the previous track in the list; if you press this button at any other time in the track, it will jump to the beginning of the track. If you press the SEEK>> button during play mode, it will jump to the next track in the list.

• While a track is playing, press the INFObutton to see the associated metadata (artist, track title, album, etc.) for that track. Pressing the INFObutton again jumps to the next screen of data for that track. Once you have seen all screens, the last INFObutton press will take you back to the play mode screen on the radio.

• Pressing the REPEAT button will change the iPod® mode to repeat the current playing track.
• Press the SCAN button to use iPod® scan mode, which will play the first five seconds of each track in the current list and then forward to the next song. To stop SCAN mode and start playing the desired track, when it is playing the track, press the SCANbutton again. During Scan mode, you can also press the << SEEK and SEEK>> buttons to select the previous and next tracks.
• RNDbutton (available on sales code RES radio only): Pressing this button toggles between Shuffle ON and

Shuffle OFF modes for the iPod®. If the RND icon is showing on the radio display, then the shuffle mode is ON.

ListOrBrowseMode

During Play mode, pressing any of the buttons described below, takes you to List mode. List mode enables you to scroll through the list of menus and tracks on the iPod ^® .

• TUNE control knob: The TUNE control knob functions in a similar manner as the scroll wheel on the iPod®.
• Turning it clockwise (forward) and counterclockwise (backward) scrolls through the lists, displaying the track detail on the radio display. Once you have the track to be played highlighted on the radio display, press the TUNEcontrol knob to select and start playing the track. Turning the TUNEcontrol knob fast will scroll through the list faster. During fast scroll, you may notice a slight delay in updating the information on the radio display.

214UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENTPANEL

• During all List modes, the iPod® displays all lists in "wrap-around" mode. So if the track is at the bottom of the list, just turn the wheel backwards (counter-clockwise) to get to the track faster.

• In List mode, the radio PRESET buttons are used as shortcuts to the following lists on the iPod®.

• Preset 1 – Playlists

• Preset 2 – Artists
• Preset 3 – Albums
• Preset 4 – Genres
• Preset 5 – Audiobooks
• Preset 6 – Podcasts

- Pressing a PRESET button will display the current list on the top line and the first item in that list on the second line.

• To Exit List mode without selecting a track, press the same PRESETbutton again to go back to Play mode.
• LISTbutton: The LISTbutton will display the top level menu of the iPod®. Turn the TUNE control knob to list the top-menu item you wish to select and press the TUNEcontrol knob. This will display the next sub-menu list item on the iPod®then you can follow the same steps to go to the desired track in that list. Not all iPod®sub-menu levels are available on this system.
• MUSICTYPEbutton: The MUSICTYPEbutton is another shortcut button to the genre listing on your iPod®.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 215

CAUTION!

• LeavingtheiPod®(oranysupporteddevice)anywhereinthevehicleinextremeheatorcoldcan altertheoperationordamagethedevice.Follow thedevicemanufacturer'sguidelines.
• PlacingitemsontheiPod®,orconnectionstothe iPod®inthevehicle,cancausedamagetothe deviceand/ortotheconnectors.

WARNING!

DonotpluginorremovetheiPod® whiledriving. Failuretofollowthiswarningcouldresultinan accident.

Uconnect™Multimedia(SATELLITERADIO)—IF EQUIPPED(REN/RER/RBZ/RESRADIOSONLY)

Satellite radio uses direct satellite-to-receiver broadcasting technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite Radio. This service offers over 130 channels of music, sports, news, entertainment, and programming for children, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios.

NOTE:Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has limited coverage in Alaska.

SystemActivation

Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre-activated, and you may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio service that is included with the factory-installed satellite radio system in your vehicle. Sirius will supply a welcome kit that contains general information, including how to setup your on-line listening account. For further

216 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

information, call the toll-free number 888-539-7474, or visit the Sirius web site at www.sirius.com, or at www-siriuscanada.ca for Canadian residents.

ElectronicSerialNumber/SiriusIdentification Number(ESN/SID)

Please have the following information available when calling:

1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification Number (ESN/SID).
2. Your Vehicle Identification Number.

To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following steps:

ESN/SIDAccessWithRESRadios

With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN or ACC position and the radio on, press the SETUP button and scroll using the TUNE/SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is selected. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob and the Sirius ID number will display. The Sirius ID number display will time out in two minutes. Press any button on the radio to exit this screen.

ESN/SIDAccessWithREN/RER/RBZRadios

While in SAT mode, press the MENU button on the radio faceplate.

Next, touch the SUBSCRIPTION tab on the touch screen. All the ESNs that apply to your vehicle will display.

SelectingUconnect™Multimedia(Satellite)Mode

Press the SAT button until "SAT" appears in the display. A CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio mode.

SatelliteAntenna

To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the roof around the rooftop antenna location. Metal objects placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause decreased performance. Larger luggage items such as

bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible, within the loading design of the rack. Do not place items directly on or above the antenna.

ReceptionQuality

Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the following reasons:

• The vehicle is parked in an underground parking structure or under a physical obstacle.
• Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the form of short audio mutes.
• Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can cause intermittent reception.
• Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can cause signal blockage.

OperatingInstructions-Uconnect™Multimedia (Satellite)Mode

NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio.

SEEKButtons

Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next channel in Satellite mode. Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will remain tuned to the new channel until you make another selection. Holding either button will bypass channels without stopping until you release it.

SCANButton

Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next channel, pausing for eight seconds before continuing to the next. To stop the search, press the SCAN button a second time.

218 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

INFOButton

Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display information between Artist, Song Title, and Composer (if available). Also, pressing and holding the INFO button for an additional three seconds will make the radio display the Song Title all of the time (press and hold again to return to normal display).

RW/FF

Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the direction of the arrows.

TUNEControl(Rotary)

Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel.

MUSICTYPEButton

Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be selected.

Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music type.

By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type function is active, the radio will be tuned to the next channel with the same selected Music Type name.

If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type (Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel.

SETUPButton

Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the following items:

- Display Sirius ID number — Press the AUDIO/SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number. This number is used to activate, deactivate, or change the Sirius subscription.

SETButton-ToSetthePushbuttonMemory

When you are receiving a channel that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window. Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this channel and press and release that button. If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET button, the channel will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory.

You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2. This allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into pushbutton memory. The channels stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice.

Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding button number will display.

Buttons1-6

These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you commit to pushbutton memory (12 Satellite stations).

OperatingInstructions-Uconnect™Phone(If Equipped)

Refer to "Uconnect™ Phone" in the Uconnect™ User Manual located on the DVD for further details.

220UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

KICKER® HIGHPERFORMANCESOUNDSYSTEM WITHDRIVER-SELECTABLESURROUND(DSS)-IFEQUIPPED

Your vehicle is equipped with a state of the art audio amplifier that provides 5.1-channel surround sound from any stereo audio source. A new feature of the KICKER ^® audio system offers the ability to choose surround sound for any audio source or video source.

"Video Surround" is optimized for rear-seat passengers watching a video, and "Audio Surround" is optimized for front-seat passengers for any audio source. This surround effect is available for audio from any source – AM/FM/CD/Satellite Radio or Video / Video / AUX – and is activated through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to "Driver-Selectable Surround Sound (DSS)" under "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)".

DSS modes for audio sources are "Stereo" and "Audio Surround," which is surround sound equalized for the front seat occupants. The "Video Surround" mode is described under "KICKER®Mobile Surround (KMS1).®" Please note that DSS effects are dependent on the mix of the original recording. Some audio will sound better in DSS modes, others in Stereo mode.

When in “Audio Surround” mode, balance is set automatically. Fader control is available to add more surround audio if desired.

The removable subwoofer is located in the rear cargo area, and is fastened in place using the child restraint anchors, located on the left rear passenger seatback.

Installing The Subwoofer

1. Lower the left rear passenger seat.

Interior view of a vehicle showing a car's rear compartment with a highlighted vent and a black arrow pointing to a button (no text or symbols present)

UNDERSTANDING YOURINSTRUMENT PANEL221

1. Align the left outside edge of the subwoofer with the outside edge of the inner cargo tie down hook.

Close-up of a car electrical socket with wiring and a black arrow pointing to it (no text or symbols visible)

222UNDERSTANDINGYOURINSTRUMENTPANEL

1. Slide the subwoofer toward the front of the vehicle so that the rear edge lines up with the end of the load floor.

Close-up of a car electrical socket with wiring and a black arrow pointing to the socket (no text or symbols visible)

1. Connect the electrical connector.

2. Fold the left rear passenger seat rearward into the upright position. The rear tether anchors should engage the hooks located on the back of the subwoofer.

Removing The Subwoofer

1. Lower the left rear passenger seat.

Close-up of a mechanical component with a black arrow pointing to a square feature, no visible text or symbols.

1. Disconnect the electrical connector.

2. Remove the subwoofer.

REMOTESOUNDSYSTEMCONTROLS—IF EQUIPPED

The remote sound system controls are located on the rear surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to access the switches.

Close-up of a car steering wheel with two black arrows pointing to the center (no text or symbols)

045003761

RemoteSoundSystemControls(BackViewOfSteering Wheel)

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 223

The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a pushbutton in the center and controls the volume and mode of the sound system. Pressing the top of the rocker switch will increase the volume, and pressing the bottom of the rocker switch will decrease the volume.

Pressing the center button will make the radio switch between the various modes available (AM/FM/TAPE/CD, etc.).

The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a pushbutton in the center. The function of the left-hand control is different depending on which mode you are in.

The following describes the left-hand control operation in each mode.

RadioOperation

Pressing the top of the switch will "Seek" up for the next listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch will "Seek" down for the next listenable station.

224UNDERSTANDINGYOURINSTRUMENTPANEL

The button located in the center of the left-hand control will tune to the next preset station that you have programmed in the radio preset pushbutton.

CDPlayer

Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next track on the CD. Pressing the bottom of the switch once will go to the beginning of the current track, or to the beginning of the previous track if it is within one second after the current track begins to play.

If you press the switch up or down twice, it plays the second track; three times, it will play the third, etc.

The center button on the left side rocker switch has no function for a single-disc CD player. However, when a multiple-disc CD player is equipped on the vehicle, the center button will select the next available CD in the player.

CD/DVDDISCMAINTENANCE

To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following precautions:

1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the surface.
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth, wiping from center to edge.
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratching the disc.
4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners, or anti-static sprays.
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become too high.

NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particular disc, it may be damaged (i.e., scratched, reflective coating removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc) oversized, or have protection encoding. Try a known good disc before considering disc player service.

RADIOOPERATIONANDCELLULARPHONES

Under certain conditions, the cellular phone being on in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated by relocating the cellular phone antenna. This condition is not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be turned down or off during cellular phone operation.

CLIMATECONTROLS

AutomaticTemperatureControl

The Automatic Temperature Control System automatically maintains the interior comfort level desired by the driver and passenger.

Front view of a car air conditioning control panel with dials, gauges, and buttons (no readable text or symbols)

8135020a
AutomaticTemperatureControls

226UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

NOTE: The numbers on the temperature dial represent a comfort setting when the Mode knob is set to AUTO, and not the actual air temperature.

Turn the mode control (on the right) knob to AUTO, and then turn the blower control (on the left) knob to either LO AUTO or HI AUTO. The LO AUTO position should be used for front seat occupants only. The HI AUTO position should be used when more airflow is desired, or when rear seat occupants are present. Dial in the comfort setting you would like the system to maintain by rotating the driver's or passenger's control knob. Once the comfort level is selected, the system will maintain that level automatically using the heating system. Should the desired comfort level require air conditioning, the system will automatically make the adjustment.

You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to function automatically. Selecting the OFF (O) position on the blower control knob stops the system completely.

NOTE: The temperature setting can be adjusted at any time without affecting automatic control operation. However, if the driver and/or passenger temperature knobs are set to the full hot or full cold positions, the air temperature out of the ducts will be full hot or full cold respectively. With the temperature setting in these positions, the system does not attempt automatic comfort control.

Air

The air conditioning in this system is automatic. Pressing this button while in AUTO mode will cause the LED to flash

Conditioning three times and remain off. This indicates that the system is in AUTO and requesting the air conditioning is not necessary.

Recirculation

The system will automatically control recirculation. However, pressing this button will temporarily put the system in "Recirculation" mode. This can be used when outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are present. This will cause the LED to illuminate.

NOTE:

• The surface of the climate control panel, and the top center of the instrument panel should be kept free of debris due to the climate control sensor's location. Mud on the windshield may also cause poor operation of this system.
• To provide you with maximum comfort in the automatic mode, during cold start-ups the blower fan will remain off until the engine warms up. However, the fan will engage immediately if the defrost mode is selected or if you manually select a blower speed.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 227

• Under certain conditions (after the vehicle is turned off) the climate control system may recalibrate and a noise may be heard for 20 seconds. This is part of normal operation.
• Most of the time, when in Automatic operation, you can temporarily put the system into Recirculation mode by pressing the "Recirculation" button. However, under certain conditions in automatic the system is blowing air out of the defrost vents. When these conditions are present, and the "Recirculation" button is pressed, the indicator will flash and remain off. This tells you that you are unable to go into Recirculation mode at this time. If you would like to go to Recirculation mode, you must first move your mode knob to Panel, Panel/Floor, or Floor, then press the "Recirculation" button. This feature will reduce the possibility of window fogging.

228UNDERSTANDINGYOURINSTRUMENTPANEL

ManualOperation

This system offers a full complement of manual override features which consist of Blower Preferred Automatic, Mode Preferred Automatic with Manual Air Temperature Control, and Manual. This means the customer can override the blower, mode, and disable the Automatic Temperature Control completely.

NOTE:

• For vehicles equipped with Remote Start, the climate controls will not function during Remote Start operation if the blower control is left in the "O" (Off) position.
• Please read the Automatic Temperature Control Operation Chart below for details.

Automatic Temperature Control Operation		The System will...
Operation	How	Blower Control	Mode Control	Air Temperature Control	Air Recirculation Control	A/C Operation
Full Automatic Operation	Set blower knob to either Hi or Lo Auto. Set temperature knobs for Comfort.	Automatic	Automatic	Automatic	Automatic but can be overridden.	Automatic
Blower Preferred Automatic	Set blower knob to any desired airflow level other than Hi or Lo Auto. Set temperature knobs for Comfort.	User selectable to any speed.	Automatic	Automatic	Automatic but can be overridden.	Automatic
Mode Preferred and Manual Air Temperature Control	Set mode knob to any desired air delivery point. Adjust Temperature knobs to select the desired temperature.	Automatic. Although Auto Lo or Hi can be selected, a manually selected airflow level is recommend for the optimum comfort.	Manual	*Manual-automatic control of air temperature is disabled. User must adjust temperature knobs to obtain the desired temperature.	User selectable outside or recirculated.	User selectable A/C on or off.
Full Manual Operation	Set blower knob to any desired airflow level other than Hi or Lo Auto. Set mode knob to any desired air delivery point other than Auto. Adjust Temperature knobs to select the desired temperature.	Manual	Manual	*Manual-automatic control of air temperature is disabled. User must adjust temperature knobs to obtain the desired temperature.	User selectable outside or recirculated.	User selectable A/C on or off.

^a Manual Air Temperature Control Operation:
When the Mode knob is set to any position other than Auto, the Temperature knob operates in the non automatic comfort condition. The numbers on the Temperature dial are no longer valid in this mode. This mode allows the user to select any desired air temperature. When the temperature knob is in full conterelclockwise position, the air temperature will be Cooler. As the knob is rotated clockwise, the temperature will increase gradually until the knob reaches the full clockwise position.

NOTE: Regardless of the type of operation, when a temperature knob is set to the full clockwise or full counterclockwise position, the system will deliver full hot or full cold air out of the ducts, respectively.

The operator can override the AUTO mode setting and select the direction of the air by rotating the right mode knob to one of the following positions. When the Mode is set to any position other than AUTO, the automatic control of air temperature is disabled. The user must adjust the temperature knobs to obtain the desired temperature.

Defrost

Air is directed to the windshield through the outlets at the base of the windshield. Air is also directed to the front door windows through the side window demister grilles. Some airflow is delivered to the floor while in defrost so that comfort can be maintained.

NOTE: The defrost mode is not automatically selected. It must be manually selected, when desired.

Defrost/Floor

Air flows through the front and rear floor outlets and the outlets at the base of the windshield. Air is also directed to the front door windows through the side window demister grilles. Some airflow is delivered to the floor while in defrost so that comfort can be maintained.

Floor

Air flows through the floor outlets located under the instrument panel and into the rear seating area through vents under the front seats. Some airflow is delivered to defrost while in floor mode, so that comfort can be maintained.

Bi-Level

Air flows both through the outlets located in the instrument panel and those located on the floor. Air flows through the registers in the back of the center console, and under the front seats to the rear seat passengers. These registers can be closed to block airflow. The center console outlets deliver conditioned air while the floor outlets deliver heated air.

Panel

Air flows through the outlets located in the instrument panel. Air flows through the registers in the back of the center console to the rear seat passengers. These registers can be closed to block airflow.

Air Conditioning

Press this button to turn the air conditioning on and off during manual operation only. Conditioned outside air is then directed through the

outlets selected on the mode control dial. The button includes an LED that illuminates when manual operation is selected.

NOTE: To manually control the air conditioning, the mode selector must be moved out of the AUTO position.

Recirculation

This button can be used to block out smoke, odors, dust, high humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired. The “Recirculation” mode should only be used temporarily. The button includes

an LED that illuminates, which indicates that the "Recirculation" mode is active. You may use this feature separately.

NOTE: Extended use of recirculation may cause the windows to fog. If the interior of the windows begins to fog, press the "Recirculate" button to return to outside air. Some temperature/humidity conditions will cause

232UNDERSTANDINGYOURINSTRUMENTPANEL

captured interior air to condense on windows and hamper visibility. For this reason, the system will not allow "Recirculation" mode to be selected while in the defrost or defrost/floor modes. Attempting to use Recirculation while in these modes will cause the LED in the button to blink and then turn off.

OperatingTips

WindowFogging

Windows will fog on the inside when the humidity inside the vehicle is high. This often occurs in mild or cool temperatures when it's rainy or humid. In most cases, turning the air conditioning (pressing the snowflake button) on will clear the fog. Adjust the temperature control, air direction, and blower speed to maintain comfort.

As the temperature gets colder, it may be necessary to direct air onto the windshield. Adjust the temperature control and blower speed to maintain comfort. Higher blower speeds will reduce fogging. Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly removed by selecting the defrost mode.

Regular cleaning of the inside of the windows with a non-filming cleaning solution (vinegar and water works very well) will help prevent contaminates (cigarette smoke, perfumes, etc.) from sticking to the windows. Contaminates increase the rate of window fogging.

SummerOperation

Air conditioned vehicles must be protected with a high quality antifreeze coolant, during the summer, to provide proper corrosion protection and to raise the boiling point of the coolant for protection against overheating. A 50% concentration is recommended. Refer to Recommended Fluids and Genuine Parts for the proper coolant type.

When using the air conditioner in extremely heavy traffic, in hot weather, especially when towing a trailer,

additional engine cooling may be required. If this situation is encountered, operate the transmission in a lower gear to increase engine RPM, coolant flow and fan speed. When stopped in heavy traffic, it may be necessary to shift into NEUTRAL (N) and press the accelerator slightly for fast idle operation to increase coolant flow and fan speed.

Your air conditioning system is also equipped with an automatic recirculation system. When the system senses a heavy load or high heat conditions, it may use partial Recirculation A/C mode to provide additional comfort.

WinterOperation

When operating the system during the winter months, make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the windshield, is free of ice, slush, snow, or other obstructions.

VacationStorage

Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service (i.e. vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again.

234UNDERSTANDINGYOURINSTRUMENTPANEL

OperatingTipsChart

WEATHER	CONTROL SETTINGS
HOT WEATHERAND VEHICLE INTERIOR ISVERY HOT	Open the windows, start the vehicle, set the Mode control to Panelor Bi-Level, and turn on A/C. Set the Fan control to the High position (full clockwise).Set the temperature control to full cool. After the hot air is flushed from the vehicle,set the Mode control to Recirculatewith A/C on and roll up the windows.Once you are comfortable, set the Mode control to Panelor Bi-Levelwith A/C on.
WARM WEATHER	If it's sunny, set the Mode control to Paneland turn on A/C. If it's cloudy ordark, set the Mode control to Bi-Levelwith A/C on. Adjust Temperaturecontrol for comfort.
COOL OR COLDHUMID CONDITIONS	Set the Mode control to Defrost/Flooror Defrost.Set the Fan Control to the High position (full clockwise). Adjust Fan andTemperature control for comfort if windows are clear.
COLD DRYCONDITIONS	Set the Mode control to Floor. If it's sunny, you may want more upper air.In this case, set the Mode control to Bi-Level. In very cold weather, if youneed extra heat at the windshield, set the Mode control to Defrost/FloororDefrostas needed. Adjust Fan and Temperature control for comfort.81352266

□Five-Speed Automatic Transmission....242

□Gear Ranges 243

□ Rocking The Vehicle 244

■ AutoStick ^® 245

□Operation 246

□ General Information 247

■ Power Steering 248

□Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) 255

□Traction Control System (TCS) 255

□Brake Assist System (BAS) 256

□Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) 257

□Electronic Stability Program (ESP) ..... 257

□Trailer Sway Control (TSC) 260

□ESP/BAS Warning Light And ESP/TCS Indicator Light 260

■ Tire Safety Information 262

□Tire Markings 262

□Tire Identification Number (TIN)....266

□Tire Terminology And Definitions....267

□Tire Loading And Tire Pressure 268

■ Tires — General Information 272

□ Run Flat Tires 272

□Tire Pressure 272

□Tire Inflation Pressures 274

□ Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation ... 275

□Radial-Ply Tires 275

□Tire Spinning 276

□Tread Wear Indicators 276

□Life Of Tire 277

□ Materials Added To Fuel 285

□Fuel System Cautions 285

□Carbon Monoxide Warnings 286

■Adding Fuel 287

□Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) 287

□ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message 288

■Trailer Towing.... 289

□ Common Towing Definitions 289

□Trailer Hitch Classification 292

□Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) ..... 293

□Trailer And Trailer Tongue Weight ..... 293

□Towing Requirements 295

□Towing Tips 298

■Recreational Towing (Behind Motorhome, Etc.) 299

Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if present, instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts.

WARNING!

• Neverleavechildrenaloneinavehicle.Leaving unattendedchildreninavehicleisdangerousfora numberofreasons.Achildorotherscouldbe seriouslyorfatallyinjured.Donotleavethekey fobintheignitionswitch.Achildcouldoperate powerwindows,othercontrols,ormovethevehicle.
• Donotleaveanimalsorchildreninsideparked vehiclesinhotweather;interiorheatbuildupmay causeseriousinjuryordeath.

NormalStarting

TipStart

NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal.

Do not press the accelerator. Use the Fob with Integrated Key to briefly turn the ignition switch to the START position and release it as soon as the starter engages. The starter motor will continue to run, and it will disengage automatically when the engine is running. If the engine fails to start, the starter will disengage automatically in 10 seconds. If this occurs, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the "Normal Starting" procedure.

ExtremeColdWeather(Below-20°For-29°C)

To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of an externally powered electric engine block heater (available from your authorized dealer) is recommended.

IfEngineFailsToStart

WARNING!

- Neverpourfuelorotherflammableliquidsinto thethrottlebodyairinletopeninginanattemptto startthevehicle. Thiscouldresultinaflashfire causingseriouspersonalinjury.

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

- Donotattempttopushortowyourvehicletoget itstarted.Vehiclesequippedwithanautomatic transmissioncannotbestartedthisway.Unburned fuelcouldenterthecatalyticconverterandonce theenginehasstarted,igniteanddamagethe converterandvehicle.Ifthevehiclehasadischargedbattery,boostercablesmaybeusedto obtainastartfromaboosterbatteryorthebattery inanothervehicle.Thistypeofstartcanbedangerousifdoneimproperly.Referto"JumpStarting"in"WhattoDoInEmergencies"forfurther information.

If the engine fails to start after you have followed the "Normal Starting" or "Extreme Cold Weather" procedures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel, push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it. Then, turn the ignition switch to the START position and release it as soon as the starter engages. The starter motor will disengage automatically in 10 seconds. Once this occurs, release the accelerator pedal, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the "Normal Starting" procedure.

CAUTION!

Topreventdamagetothestarter, wait10to15secondsbeforetryingagain.

AfterStarting

The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will decrease as the engine warms up.

AUTOMATICTRANSMISSION

CAUTION!

Damagetothetransmissionmayoccurifthefollowingprecautionsarenotobserved:

• ShiftintoPARKonlyafterthevehiclehascometo acompletestop.
• ShiftintooroutofREVERSEonlyafterthe vehiclehascometoacompletestopandtheengine isatidlespeed.
• DonotshiftfromREVERSE,PARK,orNEUTRAL intoanyforwardgearwhentheengineisabove idlespeed.
• Beforeshiftingintoanygear,makesureyourfoot isfirmlyonthebrakepedal.

WARNING!

ItisdangeroustomovetheshiftleveroutofPARKor NEUTRALiftheenginespeedishigherthanidle speed. Ifyourfootisnotfirmlyonthebrakepedal, thevehiclecouldacceleratequicklyforwardorin reverse. Youcouldlosecontrolofthevehicleandhit someoneorsomething. Onlyshiftintogearwhenthe engineisidlingnormallyandwhenyourfootis firmlyonthebrakepedal.

KeyIgnitionParkInterlock

This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Interlock which requires the shift lever to be placed in PARK prior to rotating the ignition switch to the LOCK position. The key fob can only be removed from the ignition switch when the ignition switch is in the LOCK position and once removed the shift lever is locked in PARK.

Brake/TransmissionShiftInterlockSystem

This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System (BTSI) that holds the shift lever in the PARK position when the ignition switch is in the LOCK position. To move the shift lever out of the PARK position, the ignition switch must be turned to either the ON or START position (engine running or not) and the brake pedal must be pressed.

Brake/TransmissionInterlockManualOverride

Your vehicle may be equipped with a shift lock manual override. The manual override may be used in the event that the shift lever should fail to move from PARK with the ignition switch in the ON position and the brake pedal pressed. To operate the shift lock manual override, perform the following steps:

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, but do not start the engine.
2. Firmly set the parking brake.

1. Using a flat blade screwdriver, carefully remove the shift lock manual override cover which is located on the PRNDL bezel.
2. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.
3. Using the screwdriver, reach into the manual override opening. Press and hold the shift lock lever down.

P R N D 81c1b60a

InterlockManualOverride

1. Move the shift lever into the NEUTRAL position.
2. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.

Have your vehicle inspected by your local authorized dealer, if the shift lock manual override has been used.

Five-SpeedAutomaticTransmission

The electronically controlled transmission provides a precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle, may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles/kilometers.

WARNING!

ItisdangeroustomovetheshiftleveroutofPARKor NEUTRALiftheenginespeedishigherthanidle speed. Ifyourfootisnotfirmlyonthebrakepedal, thevehiclecouldacceleratequicklyforwardorin reverse. Youcouldlosecontrolofthevehicleandhit someoneorsomething. Onlyshiftintogearwhenthe engineisidlingnormallyandwhenyourfootis firmlyonthebrakepedal.

Transmission gear engagement may be delayed after restarting the engine if the ignition switch is not turned to the LOCK position first.

PARK

This range supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission. The engine can be started in this range. Never use PARK while the vehicle is in motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range. Always apply the parking brake first, then place the shift lever into the PARK position.

GearRanges

NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating. This is especially important when the engine is cold. If there is a need to restart the engine, be sure to turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position before restarting.

WARNING!

Unintendedmovementofvehiclecouldinjure thoseinandnearthevehicle.Aswithallvehicles, youshouldneverexitavehiclewhiletheengineis running.Beforeexitingavehicle,youshouldapply theparkbrake,shiftthetransmissionintoPARK, andremovethekeyfobfromtheignitionswitch. Oncethekeyfobisremovedfromtheignition switch,theshiftleverislockedinthePARKposition, securingthevehicleagainstunwantedmovement. Furthermore,youshouldneverleavechildrenunattendedinsideavehicle.

REVERSE

This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Use only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop.

NEUTRAL

This range is used when vehicle is standing for prolonged periods with engine running. Engine may be started in this range. Set the parking brake if you must leave the vehicle.

DRIVE

This range should only be selected when the vehicle is at a complete stop and the brakes are firmly applied. The transmission automatically upshifts through fifth gear. The DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal operating conditions. For additional shifting information, refer to "AutoStick®" in "Starting and Operating" for further information.

RockingtheVehicle

If the vehicle becomes stuck in snow, sand, or mud, it can often be moved by a rocking motion. Move the shift lever between DRIVE and REVERSE, while applying slight pressure to the accelerator.

NOTE: The Electronic Stability Program (ESP) and Traction Control (if equipped) should be turned OFF before attempting to rock the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control System” in “Starting and Operating” for further information.

The least amount of accelerator pedal pressure to maintain the rocking motion without spinning the wheels or racing the engine is most effective. Racing the engine or spinning the wheels, due to the frustration of not freeing the vehicle, may lead to transmission overheating and failure. Allow the engine to idle with the shift lever in NEUTRAL for at least one minute after every five rocking-motion cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce the risk of transmission failure during prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle.

CAUTION!

When "rocking" astuck vehicle by moving between DRIVE and REVERSE, donot spin the wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain damagemay result.

AUTOSTICK®

AutoStick ^® is a driver-interactive transmission that offers manual gear shifting capability to provide the driver with more control. AutoStick ^® allows the driver to increase engine braking ability, control upshift and downshift points, and enhance the driving experience. This system can also provide the driver with more control during passing, city driving, mountain driving, trailer towing, and many other situations.

By placing the shift lever in the DRIVE position, the shift lever can be moved from side to side. This allows the driver to engage the AutoStick® mode. Moving the shift lever to the right (+) or the left (-) will engage the AutoStick® mode. In normal driving mode (Boxed "D" displayed in the PRNDL), moving the shift lever to the right (+) will engage the AutoStick® mode putting the transmission in the currently engaged gear. Moving the shift lever to the Left (-) will engage the AutoStick® mode and downshift the transmission one gear. For example, if the transmission is in Drive mode (a boxed "D" is displayed in the cluster) and is operating in third gear, tapping the shift lever to the right (+) will engage AutoStick® mode (while remaining in third gear) and a boxed "3" will be displayed in the cluster. Tapping the shift lever to the left (-) would also engage AutoStick® mode, but would force a downshift to second gear, and display a boxed "2" in the cluster." Once AutoStick® mode is engaged, a move to the right (+) or left (-) will trigger a upshift (+) or trigger a downshift (-).

NOTE: In the AutoStick® mode, the transmission will shift up and down when left or right (D-/D+) is manually selected by the driver.

The transmission will not allow a downshift if the downshift would result in an engine overspeed condition. The transmission will always allow a upshift from first to second gear, however 2nd - 3rd, 3rd - 4th, and 4th - 5th upshifts will not be allowed if the vehicle speed is too low to maintain operation in the selected gear. The transmission will automatically downshift as the vehicle slows to a stop (to prevent engine lugging) and will display the current gear. After a stop, the driver should manually upshift (D+) the transmission as the vehicle is accelerated.

When in the AutoStick®mode, as the engine RPM nears the engine maximum speed, an "UPSHIFT" message will appear in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) portion of your instrument cluster. This message appears in order to alert the driver that the engine speed is approaching its maximum value and a upshift to the next gear is required. In the event that the driver does not upshift, the engine control system will automatically do it for the driver. Refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.

Shifting into or out of the AutoStick® mode can be done at any time without taking your foot off the accelerator pedal. When the driver wishes to engage AutoStick®, simply move the shift lever to the left or right (D-/D+) position while in DRIVE.

Hold the shift lever to the right for at least one second to disengage AutoStick®. The transmission will now operate automatically; shifting between the five available gears.

GeneralInformation

• You can start out in first or second gear. The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low of a vehicle speed.
• The transmission will automatically downshift to first gear when coming to a stop. Tapping the shift lever to the D+ position (at a stop) will allow starting in second gear. After starting, the driver should continue to manually upshift (D+) as the vehicle is accelerated.
• Starting out in second gear is helpful in snowy or icy conditions.
• Avoid using speed control when AutoStick® is engaged.

• The transmission will automatically shift up when maximum engine speed is reached while AutoStick® is engaged.
• Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when AutoStick® is engaged.

POWERSTEERING

The standard power steering system will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical steering capability if power assist is lost.

If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these conditions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers.

NOTE:

• Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel travel are considered normal and do not indicate that there is a problem with the power steering system.
• Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steering pump may make noise for a short amount of time. This is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering system. This noise should be considered normal, and it does not in any way damage the steering system.

WARNING!

Continuedoperationwithreducedpowersteering assistcouldposeasafetyrisktoyourselfandothers. Serviceshouldbeobtainedassoonaspossible.

CAUTION!

Prolongedoperationofthesteeringsystemattheend ofthesteeringwheeltravelwillincreasethesteering fluidtemperatureanditshouldbeavoidedwhen possible.Damagetothepowersteeringpumpmay occur.

PowerSteeringFluidCheck

The power steering system requires the use of MOPAR® Hydraulic System Power Steering Fluid or equivalent, which meets Chrysler Material Standard MS-10838.

CAUTION!

Donotusechemicalflushesinyourpowersteering systemasthechemicalscandamageyourpower steeringcomponents.Suchdamageisnotcoveredby theNewVehicleLimitedWarranty.

WARNING!

DonotuseAutomaticTransmissionFluid(ATF),or othertypesofpowersteeringfluids,whenservicing thepowersteeringsystemofthisvehicle.Damageto thepowersteeringsystemcanresultfromtheuse of thewrongpowersteeringfluid.

Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined service interval is not required. The fluid should only be checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as anticipated. Coordinate inspection efforts through an authorized dealer.

If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all surfaces.

PARKINGBRAKE

Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking brake is fully applied and place the shift lever in the PARK position.

The parking brake lever is located in the center console. To apply the parking brake, pull the lever up as firmly as

possible. To release the parking brake, pull the lever up slightly, press the center button, then lower the lever completely.

Interior view of a car gear shift lever mechanism (no text or symbols visible)

ParkingBrake

When the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON position, the "Brake Warning Light" in the instrument cluster will illuminate.

NOTE:

• When the parking brake is applied vehicle speed is detected, the light will flash and a chime will sound to alert the driver. Fully release the parking brake before attempting to move the vehicle.
• This light only shows that the parking brake is applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.

When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade. For vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission, apply the parking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. The parking brake should always be applied whenever the driver is not in the vehicle.

WARNING!

• NeverusethePARKpositionasasubstitutefor theparkingbrake.Alwaysapplytheparking brakefullywhenparkedtoguardagainstvehicle movementandpossibleinjuryordamage.
• Neverleavechildrenaloneinavehicle.Leaving unattendedchildreninavehicleisdangerousfora numberofreasons.Achildorotherscouldbe seriouslyorfatallyinjured.
• Donotleavethekeyfobintheignitionswitch.A childcouldoperatepowerwindows,othercontrols,ormovethevehicle.
• Besuretheparkingbrakeisfullydisengaged beforedriving;failuretodosocanleadtobrake failureandanaccident.

(Continued)

- Alwaysfullyapplytheparkingbrakewhenleavingyourvehicle,oritmayrollandcausedamage orinjury. Also becertaintoleavethetransmission in PARK. Failuretodosomayallowthevehicletorollandcausedamage orinjury.

CAUTION!

If the "BrakeWarningLight" remains on with the parking brakereleased, abrakesystemmalfunction is indicated. Havethebrakesystemserviced by an authorized dealer immediately.

ANTI-LOCKBRAKESYSTEM

The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) is designed to aid the driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking conditions. The system operates with a separate

computer to modulate hydraulic pressure to prevent wheel lock-up and help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces.

All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and type and tires must be properly inflated to produce accurate signals for the computer.

WARNING!

Significant overor underinflation of tirescan lead to loss of braking effectiveness.

The Anti-Lock Brake System conducts a low-speed self-test at about 12 mph (20 km/h). If you have your foot lightly on the brake while this test is occurring you may feel slight pedal movement. The movement can be more apparent on ice and snow. This is normal.

The Anti-Lock Brake System pump motor runs during the self-test at 12 mph (20 km/h) and during an ABS stop. The pump motor makes a low humming noise during operation, which is normal.

WARNING!

• PumpingoftheAnti-LockBrakeswilldiminish theireffectivenessandmayleadtoanaccident. Pumpingmakethestoppingdistancelonger.Just pressfirmlyonyourbrakepedalwhenyouneed toslowdownorstop.
• The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) cannot prevent thenaturallawsof physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded.

WARNING!(Continued)

• TheABScannotpreventaccidents,including thoseresultingfromexcessivespeedinturns, followinganothervehicletooclosely,orhydroplaning.Onlyasafe,attentive,andskillfuldriver canpreventaccidents.
• The capabilities of an AB equipped vehicle must never be exploited in areckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of others.

CAUTION!

The Anti-Lock Brake System missubjecttopossible detrimentale effect sofelectronicinterferencecaused byimproperly installed after-marketradiosortelephones.

(Continued)

NOTE: During severe braking conditions, a pulsing sensation may occur and a clicking noise will be heard. This is normal, indicating that the Anti-Lock Brake System is functioning.

WARNING!

Touseyourbrakesandacceleratormoresafely, followthesetips:

• Donot"ride"thebrakesbyrestingyourfooton thepedal. Thiscouldoverheatthebrakesand resultinunpredictablebrakingaction,longer stoppingdistances,orbrakedamage.
• Whendescendingmountainsorhills, repeated brakingcancausebrakefadewithlossofbraking control. Avoidrepeatedheavybrakingbydown-shiftingthetransmissionorlockingoutoverdrive wheneverpossible.

WARNING!(Continued)

• Enginesmayidleathigherspeedsduringwarm-up,whichcouldcauserearwheelstospinand resultinlossofvehiclecontrol.Beespecially carefulwhiledrivingonslipperyroads,inclose-quartermaneuvering,parkingorstopping.
• Donotdrivetoofastforroadconditions,especiallywhenroadsarewetorslushy.Awedgeof watercanbuildupbetweenthetiretreadandthe road.Thishydroplaningactioncancauselossof traction,brakingability,andcontrol.
• Aftergoingthroughdeepwateroracarwash, brakesmaybecomewet,resultingindecreased performanceandunpredictablebrakingaction. Dry the brakes by gentle, intermittent pedal action whiledrivingatveryslowspeeds.

(Continued)

ELECTRONICBRAKECONTROLSYSTEM

Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic brake control system that includes Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), Traction Control System (TCS), Brake Assist System (BAS), Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM), and Electronic Stability Program (ESP). All five of these systems work together to enhance vehicle stability and control in various driving conditions.

Also, your vehicle is equipped with Trailer Sway Control (TSC).

Anti-LockBrakeSystem(ABS)

This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking conditions. The system controls hydraulic brake pressure to prevent wheel lock-up and help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking. Refer to “Anti-Lock Brake System” in “Starting and Operating” for further information.

WARNING!

The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) cannot prevent thenaturallawsof physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. ABS cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessives speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. Only as safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ABS-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of others.

TractionControlSystem(TCS)

This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, brake pressure is applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and

stability. A feature of the TCS system functions similar to a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other, the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel. This will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning. This feature remains active even if TCS and ESP are in the "ESP Partial Off" mode. Refer to "Electronic Stability Program (ESP)" in this section for more information.

BrakeAssistSystem(BAS)

The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle's braking capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The system detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake application and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the anti-lock brake system (ABS). Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the benefit of the system, you must apply continuous braking pressure during the stopping sequence (do not "pump" the brakes). Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is deactivated.

WARNING!

The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the natural law of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. BAS cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessives speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. Only as safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in arecklessordangerous manner which could jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of others.

ElectronicRollMitigation(ERM)

This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by monitoring the driver's steering wheel input and the speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicles speed are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then applies the appropriate brake and may also reduce engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur. ERM will only intervene during very severe or evasive driving maneuvers.

ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring during severe or evasive driving maneuvers. It cannot prevent wheel lift due to other factors such as road conditions, leaving the roadway or striking objects or other vehicles.

WARNING!

Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road conditions and driving conditions, influence the chance that wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM cannot prevent all wheel lift or rollovers, especially those that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects or other vehicles. Only as safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ERM-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in reckless dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of others.

ElectronicStabilityProgram(ESP)

This system enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESP corrects for over/under steering of the vehicle by applying

the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counter-acting the over/under steer condition. Engine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the desired path.

ESP uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match the intended path, ESP applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition.

• Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel position.
• Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel position.

The "ESP/TCS Indicator Light" in the instrument cluster will start to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESP system becomes active. The "ESP/TCS Indicator

Light" also flashes when TCS is active. If the "ESP/TCS Indicator Light" begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions.

WARNING!

The Electronic Stability Program (ESP) cannot prevent then natural law so of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. ESP cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessives speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. Only as safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ESP-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of others.

The ESP system has two available operating modes.

On

This is the normal operating mode for ESP. Whenever the vehicle is started, the ESP system will be in this "On" mode. This mode should be used for most driving situations. ESP should only be turned to "Partial Off" mode for specific reasons as noted below.

Partial Off

This mode is entered by momentarily pressing the "ESP OFF" switch. When in "Partial Off" mode, the TCS portion of ESP, except for the "limited slip" feature described in the TCS section, has been disabled and the "ESP/TCS Indicator Light" will be illuminated. All other stability features of ESP function normally. This mode is intended to be used if the vehicle is in deep snow, sand, or gravel conditions and more wheel spin than ESP would normally allow is required to gain traction. To

turn ESP on again, momentarily press the "ESP OFF" switch. This will restore the normal "ESP On" mode of operation.

ESP OFF P OFF 054806028

ESPOFFSwitch

NOTE: To improve the vehicle's traction when driving with snow chains, or starting off in deep snow, sand, or gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the "ESP Partial

Off" mode by pressing the "ESP OFF" switch. Once the situation requiring ESP to be switched to the "ESP Partial Off" mode is overcome, turn ESP back on by momentarily pressing the "ESP OFF" switch. This may be done while the vehicle is in motion.

TrailerSwayControl(TSC)

TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an excessively swaying trailer and will take the appropriate actions to attempt to stop the sway. The system may reduce engine power and apply the brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to counteract the sway of the trailer. TSC will become active automatically once an excessively swaying trailer is recognized. No driver action is required. Note that TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying. Always use caution when towing a trailer and follow the tongue weight recommendations. Refer to "Trailer Towing" in "Starting and Operating" for further information. When TSC is functioning, the "ESP/TCS Indicator Light" will flash, the engine power may be reduced and you may feel the brakes being applied to individual wheels to attempt to stop the trailer from swaying. TSC is disabled when the ESP system is in the "Partial Off" mode.

WARNING!

IfTSCactivateswhiledriving,slowthevehicle down,stopathenearestsafelocation,andadjustthe trailerloadtoeliminatetrailersway.

ESP/BASWarningLightandESP/TCSIndicator Light

ESP BAS

The malfunction indicator lamp for the ESP is combined with the BAS indicator. The "ESP/BAS Warning Light" and the "ESP/TCS Indicator Light" in the instrument cluster both

come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position. They should both go out with the engine running.

If the "ESP/BAS Warning Light" comes on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has been detected in either the ESP or the BAS system, or both. If this light remains on after several ignition switch cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.

• Each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, the ESP System will be ON even if it was turned off previously.
• The ESP Control System will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop when ESP becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESP activation.

NOTE:

- The "ESP/TCS Indicator Light" and the "ESP/BAS Warning Light" will come on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position.

1 — U.S. DOT Safety Standards Code (TIN) 4 — Maximum Load
2 — Size Designation 5 — Maximum Pressure
3 — Service Description 6 — Treadwear, Traction and Temperature Grades

NOTE:

• P (Passenger) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter "P" molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• European-Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards. Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width. The letter "P" is absent from this tire size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
• LT (Light Truck) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the letters "LT" that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.

- Temporary spare tires are high-pressure compact spares designed for temporary emergency use only. Tires designed to this standard have the letter "T" molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.

- High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.

EXAMPLE:

SizeDesignation:

P= Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards"....blank....." = Passenger car tire based on European design standardsLT= Light truck tire based on U.S. design standardsT= Temporary spare tire31= Overall diameter in inches (in)

215= Section width in millimeters (mm)

65= Aspect ratio in percent (%)— Ratio of section height to section width of tire10.5= Section width in inches (in)

R= Construction code—"R"means radial construction—"D"means diagonal or bias construction

15= Rim diameter in inches (in)

ServiceDescription:

95= Load Index— A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry

H= Speed Symbol— A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions— The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits)

LoadIdentification:

"....blank..." = Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire

ExtraLoad(XL)= Extra load (or reinforced) tire

LightLoad= Light load tire

C,D,E= Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure

MaximumLoad— Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry

Maximum Pressure — Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire

The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire, however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.

Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire.

EXAMPLE:

DOTMAL9ABCD0301

DOT= Department of Transportation— This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use

MA= Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)

L9= Code representing the tire size (two digits)

ABCD= Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)

03= Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)—03 means the 3rd week.

01= Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)—01 means the year 2001— Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991

TireTerminologyandDefinitions

TermDefinition
B-PillarThe vehicle B-Pillar is a structural member of the body located between the front and rear door (of a four-door vehicle) running from the sill to the roof.
ColdTirePressureCold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a three hour period. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or KPa (kilopascals).
MaximumInflationPressureThe maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The max inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall.
RecommendedInflationPressureVehicle manufacturer's recommended tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard.
TirePlacardA paper label permanently attached to the vehicle showing the vehicle's loading capacity, the original equipment tire size and the recommended inflation pressure.

NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver's side B-Pillar.

EXAMPLE 811ad0d0

TirePlacardLocation

TireandLoadingInformationPlacard

TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION SEATING CAPACITY - TOTAL 5 FRONT 2 REAR 3 THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF OCCUPANTS AND CARGO SHOULD NEVER EXCEED XXX KG OR XXX LBS. TIRE FRONT REAR SPARE ORIGINAL TIRE SIZE P195/70R14 P195/70R14 T125/70D15 COLD TIRE INFLATION PRESSURE 200kPa, 29PSI 200kPa, 29PSI 420kPa, 60PSI SEE OWNER'S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 4N109268

811b5a9a

TireandLoadingInformationPlacard

This placard tells you important information about the:

1) number of people that can be carried in the vehicle
2) total weight your vehicle can carry

3) tire size designed for your vehicle
4) cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and spare tires.

Loading

The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You will not exceed the tire's load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information placard and in the "Vehicle Loading" section of this manual.

NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded. For further information on GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to "Vehicle Loading" in this section.

To determine the maximum loading conditions of your vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard. The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed the weight referenced here.

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit

1. Locate the statement "The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg" on your vehicle's placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.

1. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if "XXX" amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will be five 150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs (295 kg) (since 5 x 150 = 750, and 1400 - 750 = 650 lbs [295 kg]).
2. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
3. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.

NOTE:

• The following table shows examples on how to calculate total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants. This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
• For the following example, the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs (392 kg).

Occupants TOTAL FRONT REAR Combined weight of occupants and cargo from Tire Placard MINUS Combined Occupant's weight = AVAILABLE Cargo/Luggage and Trailer Tongue Weight EXAMPLE 1 5 2 3 865 lbs minus 670 lbs = 195 lbs EXAMPLE 2 3 2 1 865 lbs minus 540 lbs = 325 lbs EXAMPLE 3 2 2 0 865 lbs minus 400 lbs = 465 lbs Occupant 1: 200 lbs Occupant 2: 130 lbs Occupant 3: 160 lbs Occupant 4: 100 lbs Occupant 5: 80 lbs TOTAL WEIGHT: 670 lbs

811a4d11

Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading can cause it failure, affect vehicle handling, and increase your stopping distance. Usetires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never overload them.

TIRES—GENERALINFORMATION

RunFlatTires

This vehicle is equipped with run flat tires. Although the tires are designed with a “run flat” feature that allows the vehicle to be driven about 50 miles (80 km) at 55 mph (88 km/h), immediate service should be obtained.

WARNING!

Donotexceed50mph(80km/h)ifthe"TirePressure MonitoringTelltaleLight"isilluminated.Vehicle handlingandbrakingmaybereduced.Youcould haveanaccidentandbeseverelyorfatallyinjured.

NOTE: The "run flat" feature eliminates the need for a spare tire or jack. This vehicle is not equipped with either a spare tire or jack.

TirePressure

Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary areas are affected by improper tire pressure:

Safety

WARNING!

• Improperlyinflatedtiresaredangerousandcan causeaccidents.
• Underinflationincreasestireflexingandcan resultinover-heatingandtirefailure.
  • Overinflationreducesatire'sabilitytocushion shock.Objectsontheroadandchuckholescan causedamagethatresultsintirefailure.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
  • Overinflatedorunderinflatedtirescanaffect vehiclehandlingandcanfailsuddenly, resulting inlossofvehiclecontrol.
• Unequaltirepressuresfromonesideofthevehicletotheothercancausethevehicletodrifttotherightorleft.

Economy

Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier tire replacement. Under inflation also increases tire rolling resistance and results in higher fuel consumption.

RideComfortandVehicleStability

Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride. Over inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride. Both under inflation and over inflation affect the stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish response or over responsiveness in the steering.

Unequal tire pressures can cause erratic and unpredictable steering response.

Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the vehicle to drift left or right.

The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver's side "B" Pillar.

The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least once a month. Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to check tire pressure. Do not make a visual judgement when determining proper inflation. Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they are under inflated.

CAUTION!

Afterinspectingoradjustingthetirepressurealways reinstallthevalvestemcap. Thiswillpreventmoistureanddirtfromenteringthevalvestem,which coulddamagethevalvestem.

Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always “cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure

is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire side wall.

Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with temperature changes.

Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per 12^ F ( 7^ C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in the Winter.

Example: If garage temperature = 68^ F ( 20^ C) and the outside temperature = 32^ F ( 0^ C) then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12^ F ( 7^ C) for this outside temperature condition.

Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will be too low.

TirePressuresforHighSpeedOperation

The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may be required for high speed vehicle operation. Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.

WARNING!

Highspeeddrivingwithyourvehicleundermaximumloadisdangerous.Theaddedstrainonyour tirescouldcausethemtofail.Youcouldhavea seriousaccident.Donotdrivevehicleloadedtothe maximumcapacityatcontinuousspeedsabove 75mph(120km/h).

Radial-PlyTires

WARNING!

Combiningradialplytireswithothertypesoftires onyourvehiclewillcauseyourvehicletohandle poorly.Theinstabilitycouldcauseanaccident.Alwaysuseradialtiresinsetsoffour.Nevercombine themwithothertypesoftires.

Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in the tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult your dealer for radial tire repairs.

TireSpinning

When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not spin your vehicle's wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h).

WARNING!

Fastspinningtirescanbedangerous. Forcesgenerated by excessive wheels speeds may cause it to damage or failure. Atire could explode and injuresome one. Donot spiny our vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) when you are stuck, and donot let any onear as pinning wheelnomatter what the speed.

TreadWearIndicators

Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to help you in determining when your tires should be replaced.

Two views of a car tire showing tread pattern and tire edge details (no text or symbols)

055007576

1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire

These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth becomes 1/16 in (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced.

LifeofTire

The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including but not limited to:

• Driving style
• Tire pressure
• Distance driven

WARNING!

Alltiressshouldbereplacedaftersixyears,regardless oftheremainingtread.Failuretofollowthiswarning canresultinsuddentirefailure.Youcouldlosecontrol andhaveanaccidentresultinginserious injury.

Keep unmounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact with oil, grease and gasoline.

ReplacementTires

The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manufacturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent to the originals in size, quality and performance when replacement is needed (see the paragraph on tread wear indicators). Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard for the size designation of your tire. The service description and load identification will be found on the original equipment tire. Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle. We recommend that you contact your original equipment or an authorized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifications or capability.

WARNING!

• Donotuseatire, wheelsizeorratingotherthan thatspecifiedforyourvehicle. Some combinations of unapprovedtiresandwheelsmaychangesuspensiondimensionsandperformancecharacteristics, resultinginchangestosteering, handling, and brakingofyourvehicle. This can cause unpredictablehandlingandstresstosteeringandsuspensioncomponents. You could lose control and have an accident resulting in serious injury or death. Use only the tire and wheelsizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle.
• Neveruseatirewithasmallerloadindexor capacity,otherthanwhatwasoriginallyequipped onyourvehicle.Usingatirewithasmallerload indexcouldresultintireoverloadingandfailure. Youcouldlosecontrolandhaveanaccident.

WARNING!(Continued)

- Failuretoequipyourvehiclewithtireshaving adequatespeedcapabilitycanresultinsuddentire failureandlossofvehiclecontrol.

CAUTION!

Replacingoriginaltireswithtiresofadifferentsize mayresultinfalsespeedometerandodometerreadings.

Do not rotate the tires as the wider rear tires will not fit on the front of the vehicle.

(Continued)

TIREPRESSUREMONITORSYSTEM(TPMS)

PremiumSystem

The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver Module.

NOTE: It is particularly important, for you to check the tire pressure in all of your tires regularly and to maintain the proper pressure.

The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) consists of the following components:

• Receiver Module
  • 4 Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors

• 3 Trigger Modules (mounted in three of the four wheel wells)

• Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System Messages, which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), and a graphic displaying tire pressures

• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light

TirePressureMonitoringLowPressureWarnings

The "Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light" will illuminate in the instrument cluster, and an audible chime will be activated when one or more of the four active road tire pressures are low. In addition, the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) will display one or more Low Pressure messages (Left Front, Left Rear, Right Front, Right Rear) for three seconds, and a graphic display of the pressure value(s) with the low tire(s) flashing. Refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.

NOTE: Your system can be set to display pressure units in PSI, kPa, or BAR.

TIRE 35 34 PSI 24 34

8197133c

Should a low tire condition occur on any of the four active road tire(s), you should stop as soon as possible, and inflate the low tire(s) that is flashing on the graphic display to the vehicle's recommended cold tire pressure.

The system will automatically update, the graphic display of the pressure value(s) will stop flashing, and the "Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light" will extinguish once the updated tire pressure(s) have been received. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this information.

CheckTPMSystemMessage

The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds, and remain on solid when a system fault is detected. The system fault will also sound a chime. The EVIC will display a “CHECK TPM SYSTEM” message for three seconds. This text message is then followed by a graphic display, with “- -” in place of the pressure value(s) indicating which Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor(s) is not being received.

NOTE: Your system can be set to display pressure units in PSI, kPa, or BAR.

If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat, providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault no longer exists, the "Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light" will no longer flash, the "CHECK TPM SYSTEM" text message will not be present, and a pressure value will be displayed instead of dashes. A system fault can occur by any of the following scenarios:

1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the TPM sensors.
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals.
3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.

In addition, the "Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light" will turn OFF and the graphic in the EVIC will display a new pressure value instead of dashes (- -), as long as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15mph (24km / h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information.

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following conditions:

• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the following licenses:

United States. K R 5 S 1 2 0

Canada 2671-S120123

FUELREQUIREMENTS

6.1LEngine

The 6.1L engine is designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide excellent fuel economy and performance when using high-quality premium unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 91 or higher.

Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is required. Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before considering service for the vehicle.

Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the Worldwide Fuel Charter, WWFC) which define fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced emissions, performance, and durability for your vehicle. The manufacturer recommends the use of gasoline that meets the WWFC specifications, if they are available.

Reformulated Gasoline

Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline.” Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality.

The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gasoline. Properly blended reformulated gasoline will provide excellent performance and durability of engine and fuel system components.

Gasoline/OxygenateBlends

Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxygenates such as 10% ethanol, MTBE, and ETBE. Oxygenates are required in some areas of the country during the winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions. Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in your vehicle.

CAUTION!

DONOTusegasolinecontainingMethanolorE85 Ethanol.Useoftheseblendsmayresultinstarting anddriveabilityproblemsandmaydamagecritical fuelsystemcomponents.

Problems that result from using methanol/gasoline or E85 ethanol blends are not the responsibility of the manufacturer. While MTBE is an oxygenate made from methanol, it does not have the negative effects of Methanol.

Non-FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline containing 10% ethanol (E10). Gasoline with higher ethanol content may void the vehicle's warranty.

If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E85 fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:

• operate in a lean mode
- OBD II "Malfunction Indicator Light" on
• poor engine performance
• poor cold start and cold driveability
- increased risk for fuel system component corrosion

To fix a Non-FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with E85 perform the following:

• drain the fuel tank (see your authorized dealer)

• change the engine oil and oil filter

- disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the engine controller memory

More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged exposure to E85 fuel.

MMTInGasoline

MMT is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline blended with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number without MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and reduces emissions system performance in some vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump, therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether the gasoline contains MMT. It is even more important to look for gasoline without MMT in Canada, because MMT

can be used at levels higher than those allowed in the United States. MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformulated gasoline.

MaterialsAddedtoFuel

All gasoline sold in the United States is required to contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional detergents or other additives is not needed under normal conditions and they would result in additional cost. Therefore, you should not have to add anything to the fuel.

FuelSystemCautions

CAUTION!

Followtheseguidelinestomaintainyourvehicle's performance:

(Continued)

CAUTION!(Continued)

• TheuseofleadedgasisprohibitedbyFederallaw. Usingleadedgasolinecanimpairengineperformanceanddamagetheemissionscontrolsystem.
• Anout-of-tuneengineorcertainfuelorignition malfunctionscancausethecatalyticconverterto overheat. If you notice apungentburningodor or somelightsmoke, you'renginem maybe out of tune or malfunctioning and may require immediate service. Contact your authorized dealer for service assistance.
• Theuseoffueladditives, which are now being sold as octaneenhancers, is not recommended. Most of these products contain high concentration of methanol. Fuelsystem damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer.

286STARTING ANDOPERATING

NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control system can result in civil penalties being assessed against you.

CarbonMonoxideWarnings

WARNING!

Carbonmonoxide(CO)inexhaustgasesisdeadly. Followtheprecautionsbelowtopreventcarbon monoxidepoisoning:

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

• Donotinhaleexhaustgases. They contain carbon monoxide, acolorless and odorless gas, which can kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as agarage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the engineer running for an extended period. If the vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine running form more than a short period, adjust the ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
• Guardagainstcarbonmonoxidewithproper maintenance.Havetheexhaustsysteminspected everytimethevehicleisraised.Haveanyabnormalconditionsrepairedpromptly.Untilrepaired, drivewithallsidewindowsfullyopen.
• Keeptheliftgate/trunkclosedwhendrivingyour vehicletopreventcarbonmonoxideandother poisonous exhaust gases from entering the vehicle.

ADDINGFUEL

FuelFillerCap(GasCap)

The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door, on the driver's side of the vehicle. If the gas cap is lost or damaged, be sure the replacement cap is for use with this vehicle.

Close-up of a car's front bumper with a mounted circular dial and a black arrow pointing to the nose (no visible text or symbols)

FuelFillerCap

CAUTION!

• Damagetothefuelsystemoremissioncontrol systemcouldresultfromusinganimproperfuel cap(gascap).Apoorlyfittingcapcouldletimpuritiesintothefuelsystem.Also,apoorlyfitting after-marketcapcancausethe"MalfunctionIndicatorLight(MIL)"toilluminate,duetofuelvapors escapingfromthesystem.
• ApoorlyfittinggascapmaycausetheMILtoturn on.
• To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, donot "top off" the fueltankafterfilling.

WARNING!

• Neverhaveanysmokingmaterialslitinornear thevehiclewhenthegascapisremovedorthe tankfilled.
• Neveraddfuelwhentheengineisrunning. This is inviolationofmoststateandfederalfireregulationsandwillcausetheMILtoturnon.
• Afiremayresultifgasolineispumpedintoa portablecontainerthatisinsideofavehicle.You couldbeburned.Alwaysplacegascontainerson thegroundwhilefilling.

NOTE:

• When the fuel nozzle "clicks" or shuts off, the fuel tank is full.
• Tighten the gas cap about 1/4 turn until you hear one click. This is an indication that cap is properly tightened.

- If the gas cap is not tighten properly, the MIL will come on. Be sure the gas cap is tightened every time the vehicle is refueled.

LooseFuelFillerCapMessage

If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a "CHECK GASCAP" message will be displayed in the EVIC (Electronic Vehicle Information Center). Refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information Center" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information. Tighten the fuel filler cap until a "clicking" sound is heard. This is an indication that the fuel filler cap is properly tightened. Refer to "Onboard Diagnostic System" in "Maintaining Your Vehicle" for further information.

TRAILERTOWING

In this section you will find safety tips and information on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer carefully review this information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as possible.

WARNING!

• Donottowwhenthe"TirePressureMonitoring TelltaleLight"isilluminated.Failureretofollow thiscouldresultinlossofcontrolandserious injury.
• Thetailpipes may be hot and you could be seriously injured if you come into contact with the tailpipes.

To maintain warranty coverage, follow the requirements and recommendations in this manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.

CommonTowingDefinitions

The following trailer towing related definitions will assist you in understanding the following information:

GrossVehicleWeightRating(GVWR)

The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle. This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR.

GrossTrailerWeight(GTW)

The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or temporary) loaded in or on the trailer in its "loaded and ready for operation" condition. The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight of the trailer must be supported by the scale.

GrossCombinationWeightRating(GCWR)

The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination.

NOTE: The GCWR rating includes a 150 lbs (68 kg) allowance for the presence of a driver.

GrossAxleWeightRating(GAWR)

The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR.

WARNING!

It is important that you donot exceed them maximum frontorrear GAWR. Adangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose control of the vehicle and have an accident.

TongueWeight(TW)

The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the trailer. In most cases it should not be less than 10% or more than 15% of the trailer load. You must consider this as part of the load on your vehicle.

FrontalArea

The frontal area is the maximum height and maximum width of the front of a trailer.

Weight-CarryingHitch

A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kind of hitches are the most popular on the market today and they are commonly used to tow small- and medium-sized trailers.

Weight-DistributingHitch

A weight-distributing system works by applying leverage through spring (load) bars. They are typically used for heavier loads, to distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow vehicle's front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used in accordance with the manufacturers' directions, it provides for a more level ride, offering more consistent steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway control also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability. Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue Weights (TW) and may be required depending on Vehicle and Trailer configuration/loading to comply with gross axle weight rating (GAWR) requirements.

WARNING!

• Animproperlyadjustedweight-distributinghitch systemmayreducehandling,stability,braking performance,andcouldresultinanaccident.
• Weight-distributinghitchsystemsmaynotbe compatiblewithSurgeBrakeCouplers.Consult withyourhitchandtrailermanufacturerora reputableRecreationalVehicledealerforadditionalinformation.

The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition. Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) chart for the Max. GTW towable for your given drivetrain.

TrailerHitchClassificationDefinitions
ClassMax.TrailerHitchIndustryStandards
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty	3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty 5,000 lbs (2 268 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty	10,000 lbs (4 540 kg)
Fifth Wheel/ Gooseneck	Greater than 10,000 lbs (4 540 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given drivetrain.

All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.

TrailerTowingWeights(MaximumTrailerWeightRatings)

The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.

Engine/Transmission	GCWR(GrossCombined Wt.Rating)	FrontalAreaMax.	GTW(Gross TrailerWt.)	Max.TrailerTongue Wt.(SeeNote)
6.1L Automatic 8	800 lbs (3 992 kg) 35 sq ft (3.25 sq m)	3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)	308 lbs (140 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.

NOTE: The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard. Refer to "Tire-Safety Information" in "Starting and Operating" for further information.

TrailerandTrailerTongueWeight

Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch of your vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to sway severelyside to side which will cause loss of control of vehicle and trailer. Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of many trailer accidents.

Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on your trailer hitch.

60% 40% 057003767

Consider the following items when computing the weight on the front/rear axles of the vehicle:

• The trailer tongue weight of the trailer.
- The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put in or on your vehicle.
• The weight of the driver and all passengers.

NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional factory-installed options, or dealer-installed options, must be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle. Refer to the "Tire and Loading Information Placard" in "Tire Safety Information" for the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo for your vehicle.

TowingRequirements

To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drive-train components the following guidelines are recommended:

CAUTION!

• Donottowatraileratallduringthefirst500miles (805km)thenewvehicleisdriven.Theengine, axleorotherpartscouldbedamaged.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a traileristowed, donot drive over 50 mph (80 km/h) and donot make starts at full throttle. This helpsthe engine and other part sof the vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.

WARNING!

Impropertowingcanleadtoaninjuryaccident. Followtheseguidelinestomakeyourtrailertowing assafeaspossible:

• Make certain that the load dissecured in the trailer and will not shift during travel. Whentrailing cargothatis not fully secured, dynamic load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the driver to control. You could lose control of your vehicle and have an accident.
• Whenhaulingcargoortowingatrailer, donot overloadyourvehicleortrailer. Overloading can causealossofcontrol, poor performanceordamagetobrakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering, suspension, chassisstructureortires.

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

• Safetychainsmustalwaysbeusedbetweenyour vehicleandtrailer.Alwaysconnectthechainsto thehookretainersofthevehiclehitch.Crossthe chainsunderthetrailertongueandallowenough slackforturningcorners.
• Vehicleswithtrailersshouldnotbeparkedona grade. Whenparking, apply the parking brake on the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle transmission in PARK. Always, blockor "chock" the trailer wheels.
  • GCWRmustnotbeexceeded.
• Totalweightmustbedistributedbetweenthetow vehicleandthetrailersuchthatthefollowingfour ratingsarenotexceeded:
  1.GVWR
  2.GTW

WARNING!(Continued)

3.GAWR

1. Tongueweighitratingforthetrailerhitchutilized (Thisrequirementmaylimittheabilitytoalways achieve the 10% to 15% range of tongueweight as a percentage of total trailer weight).

TowingRequirements-Tires

• Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to "Tires – General Information" in "Starting and Operating" for proper tire inflation procedures.
• Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures before trailer usage.

(Continued)

• Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before towing a trailer. Refer to "Tires – General Information" in "Starting and Operating" for proper inspection procedure.
• When replacing tires, refer to "Tires – General Information" in "Starting and Operating" for proper tire replacement procedures. Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle's GVWR and GAWR limits.

TowingRequirements–TrailerBrakes

- Do notinterconnect the hydraulic brake system or vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer. This could cause inadequate braking and possible personal injury.

• An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is required when towing a trailer with electronically actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic brake controller is not required.
• Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1,000 lbs (454 kg) and required for trailers in excess of 2,000 lbs (907 kg).

CAUTION!

If the trailer weighsmorethan 1,000 lbs (454 kg) loaded, it should have its own brakes and they should be of adequate capacity. Failure to this could lead to accelerated brakelining wear, higher brake pedaleffort, and longer stopping distances.

WARNING!

• Donotconnecttrailerbrakestoyourvehicle's hydraulicbrakelines.Itcanoverloadyourbrake systemandcauseittofail.Youmightnohave brakeswhenyouneedthemandcouldhavean accident.
• Towinganytrailerwillincreaseyourstopping distance. Whentowingyoushouldallowforadditionalspacebetweenyourvehicleandthevehicleinfrontofyou.Failureretodosocouldresultinan accident.

TowingTips

Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping and backing the trailer in an area away from heavy traffic.

AutomaticTransmission

The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. However, if frequent shifting occurs while in this range, use the AutoStick® feature (D-) to select a lower gear range.

NOTE: Using a lower gear range while operating the vehicle under heavy operating conditions will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat build up. This action will also provide better engine braking.

The automatic transmission fluid and filter should be changed if you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45 minutes of continuous operation. Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals.

ElectronicSpeedControl-IfEquipped

- Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.

• When using the speed control, if you experience speed drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until you can get back to cruising speed.
• Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to maximize fuel efficiency.

CoolingSystem

To reduce potential for engine and transmission overheating, take the following actions:

- City Driving

When stopped for short periods of time, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed.

- Highway Driving

Reduce speed.

- Air Conditioning

Turn off temporarily.

RECREATIONAL TOWING(BEHIND MOTORHOME,ETC.)

Recreationaltowingisnotallowed.

CAUTION!

Towing this vehicle with any of its wheels on the ground can cause severe transmission and/or transfer cased damage. Damage from impropertowing is not covered by your new vehicle warranty.

WHATODOINEMERGENCIES

CONTENTS

■Hazard Warning Flashers.... 302 □Preparations For Jump-Start.... 305
■If Your Engine Overheats.... 302 □Jump-Starting Procedure.... 306
■Jacking And Tire Changing.... 3 0 4 ■Emergency Tow Hooks — If Equipped.... 3 0 8
□Run Flat Tires.... 304 ■Towing A Disabled Vehicle.... 309
■Jump-Starting Procedures....304

302WHATODOINEMERGENCIES

The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the switch bank just above the climate controls.

Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning flasher. When the switch is activated, all directional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an emergency. Press the switch a second time to turn off the Hazard Warning flasher.

This is an emergency warning system and should not be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your vehicle is disabled and is creating a safety hazard for other motorists.

If it is necessary to leave the vehicle to go for service, the Hazard Warning flasher will continue to operate with the ignition key removed and the vehicle locked.

NOTE: With extended use, the Hazard Warning flasher may run down your battery.

IFYOURENGINEOVERHEATS

In any of the following situations, you can reduce the potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.

• On the highways — Slow down.
• In city traffic — While stopped, shift the transmission to NEUTRAL, but do not increase the engine idle speed.

WHATODOINEMERGENCIES303

CAUTION!

Drivingwithahotcoolingsystemcoulddamage yourvehicle.IfthetemperaturegaugereadsHOT(H),pulloverandstopthevehicle.Idlethevehicle withtheairconditionerturnedoffuntilthepointer dropsbackintothenormalrange.Ifthepointer remainsonHOT(H),andyouhearcontinuous chimes,turntheengineoffimmediatelyandcallfor service.

NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition:

- If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C system adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.

- You can also turn the temperature control to maximum heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control to high. This allows the heater core to act as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine cooling system.

WARNING!

Youorotherscanbebadlyburnedbyhotengine coolant(antifreeze)orsteamfromyourradiator.If youseeorhearsteamcomingfromunderthehood, donotopenthehooduntiltheradiatorhashadtime tocool.Nevertrytoopenacoolingsystempressure capwhetheradiatororcoolantbottleishot.

304WHATODOINEMERGENCIES

JACKINGANDTIRECHANGING

RunFlatTires

This vehicle is equipped with run flat tires. Although the tires are designed with a “run flat” feature that allows the vehicle to be driven approximately 50 miles (80 km) at 55 mph (88 km/h). immediate service should be obtained.

WARNING!

Donotexceed50mph(80km/h)ifthe"TirePressure MonitoringTelltaleLight"isilluminated.Vehicle handlingandbrakingmaybereduced.Youcould haveanaccidentandbeseverelyorfatallyinjured.

NOTE: The "run flat" feature eliminates the need for a spare tire and jack. This vehicle is not equipped with either a spare tire or jack.

JUMP-STARTINGPROCEDURES

If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump-started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.

NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack follow the manufacturer's operating instructions and precautions.

CAUTION!

Donotuseaportable battery boosterpackorany otherboostersourcewithasystemvoltagegreater than12Voltsordamagetothebattery,startermotor, alternatororelectricalsystemmayoccur.

WARNING!

Whentemperaturesarebelowthefreezingpoint, electrolyteinadischargedbatterymayfreeze.Donot attemptjump-startingbecausethebatterycouldruptureorexplodeandcausepersonalinjury.Battery temperaturemustbebroughtabovefreezingpoint beforeattemptingajump-start.

PreparationsforJump-Start

The battery in your vehicle is located in the front of the engine compartment, behind the left headlight assembly.

Interior view of a car showing battery compartments and wiring (no visible text or symbols)

PositiveBatteryPost

306WHATODOINEMERGENCIES

WARNING!

• Takecaretoavoidtheradiatorcoolingfanwheneverthehoodisraised.Itcanstartanytimetheignitionswitchison.Youcanbeinjuredbymovingfanblades.
• Removeanymetaljewelrysuchaswatchbandsor braceletsthatmightmakeaninadvertentelectrical contact.Youcouldbeseriouslyinjured.

• Batteriescontainsulfuricacidthatcanburnyour skinoreyesandgeneratehydrogengaswhichis flammableandexplosive.Keepopenflamesor sparksawayfromthebattery.

• Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK.

• Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical accessories.

• If using a another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.

WARNING!

Donotallowvehiclestotoucheachotherasthis couldestablishagroundconnectionandpersonal injurycouldresult.

Jump-StartingProcedure

WARNING!

Failure to follow this procedure could result in personal injury or property damaged by a battery explosion.

CAUTION!

Failure to follow these procedures could result in damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle orthedischarged vehicle.

1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+)jumper cable to the positive (+)post of the booster battery.
3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable to the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-)jumper cable to a good engine ground (exposed metal part of the discharged vehicle's engine) away from the battery and the fuel injection system.

WARNING!

Donotconnectthecabletothenegativepost(-)ofthe dischargedbattery. Theresultingelectricalspark couldcausethebatterytoexplodeandcouldresultin personalinjury.

1. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
   Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables in the reverse sequence:
2. Disconnect the negative (-)jumper cable from the engine ground of the vehicle with the discharged battery.
3. Disconnect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.

308WHATODOINEMERGENCIES

1. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper cable from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
2. Disconnect the positive (+)end of the jumper cable from the positive (+)post of the discharged vehicle.
3. Reinstall the air intake duct.

If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle you should have the battery and charging system inspected at your authorized dealer.

CAUTION!

Accessoriesthatcanbepluggedintothevehicle poweroutletsdrawpowerfromthevehicle'sbattery, evenwhennotinuse(i.e.,cellularphones,etc.). Eventually,ifpluggedinlongenough,thevehicle's batterywilldischargesufficientlytodegradebattery lifeand/orpreventtheenginefromstarting.

EMERGENCYTOWHOOKS—IFEQUIPPED

If your vehicle is equipped with tow hooks, there will be one in the rear and two mounted on the front of the vehicle. The rear hook will be located on the driver's side of the vehicle.

NOTE: For off-road recovery, it is recommended to use both of the front tow hooks to minimize the risk of damage to the vehicle.

CAUTION!

Towhooksareforemergencyuseonly,torescuea vehiclestrandedoffroad.Donotusetowhooksfor towtruckhookuporhighwaytowing.Youcould damageyourvehicle.

WARNING!

Standclearofvehicleswhenpullingwithtowhooks. Towstrapsandchainsmaybreak,causingserious injury.

TOWINGADISABLEDVEHICLE

The manufacturer requires towing your vehicle with all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.

CAUTION!

• Towing this vehicle using any other method could result in extensive damage to the transfer case and/or transmission.
• SuchdamageisnotcoveredbytheNewVehicle LimitedWarranty.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

CONTENTS

■Engine Compartment-6.1L....3 1 3

■Onboard Diagnostic System – OBD II ..... 3 1 4

□Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message....314

■Emissions Inspection And Maintenance Programs.... 3 1 5

■Replacement Parts 317

■Dealer Service.... 3 1 7

■Maintenance Procedures....317

□Engine Oil 318

□Engine Oil Filter 321

□Engine Air Cleaner Filter....321

□Maintenance-Free Battery 322

□Air Conditioner Maintenance....322

□Body Lubrication.... 3 2 3

□Windshield Wiper Blades 324

□ Adding Washer Fluid 324

□Exhaust System 325

□Cooling System 328

□Brake System 3 3 4
□Automatic Transmission.... 3 3 5
□Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion.... 3 3 6

■Fuses.... 341

□Interior Fuses.... 341
□Underhood Fuses (Power Distribution Center).... 3 4 3
□Underhood Fuses (Integrated Power Module).... 3 4 6

■Vehicle Storage.... 3 4 8
■Replacement Bulbs 349
■Bulb Replacement.... 349

□High Intensity Discharge Headlamps (HID) — If Equipped .... 3 4 9
□Halogen Headlamps — If Equipped . . . . . . 3 5 0
□Front Turn Signal 351
□Front Fog Lamp 352
☐Rear Tail, Stop, Turn Signal, And Backup Lamps 352
□Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) 354

■ Fluid Capacities 355

■Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts ..... 3 5 6

□Engine 356
□Chassis 357

ENGINECOMPARTMENT-6.1L

Technical diagram of an automotive engine bay with numbered components for identification

1 — Engine Coolant Reservoir 7 — Engine Oil Dipstick
2 — Power Distribution Center 8 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
3 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 9 — Engine Oil Fill
4 — Integrated Power Module 10 — Coolant Pressure Cap
5 — Battery 11 — Air Cleaner Filter
6 — Washer Fluid Reservoir

ONBOARDDIAGNOSTICSYSTEM-OBDII

Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic transmission control systems. When these systems are operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within current government regulations.

If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system will turn on the "Malfunction Indicator Light" (MIL). It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.

CAUTION!

• ProlongeddrivingwiththeMILoncouldcause furtherdamagetotheemissioncontrolsystem.It couldalsoaffectfueleconomyanddrivability.The vehiclemustbeservicedbeforeanyemissions testscanbeperformed.
• If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running, severecatalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur. Immediates service is required.

LooseFuelFillerCapMessage

After fuel is added, the vehicle diagnostic system can determine if the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged. A “CHECK GASCAP” message will be displayed in the EVIC. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. Tighten the

gas cap until a "clicking" sound is heard. This is an indication that the gas cap is properly tightened.

The message will remain displayed until the vehicle diagnostic system can retest the fuel system. The test will perform the next time the vehicle is started, if the vehicle was keyed off above 40^ F ( 4^ C) outside temperature and the following vehicle start is above 40^ F ( 4^ C) outside temperature. It may be possible to have a message that will not clear due to the test being disabled due to low outside temperatures. If the test is performed and the problem is gone, the message will disappear.

If the problem persists, the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started. This might indicate a damaged cap. If the problem is detected twice in a row, the system will turn on the MIL. Resolving the problem will turn the MIL off. See your authorized dealer for service.

EMISSIONSINSPECTIONANDMAINTENANCE PROGRAMS

In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass an inspection of your vehicle's emissions control system. Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.

For states that require an Inspection and Maintenance (I/M), this check verifies the "Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)" is functioning and is not on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II system is ready for testing.

Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replacement. If the OBD II system should be determined not ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.

316MAINTAININGYOURVEHICLE

Your vehicle has a simple ignition key-actuated test, which you can use prior to going to the test station. To check if your vehicle's OBD II system is ready, you must do the following:

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, but do not crank or start the engine.
2. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start this test over.
3. As soon as you turn the ignition switch to the ON position, you will see the MIL symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check.
4. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will happen:

a. The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF

the ignition or start the engine. This means that your vehicle's OBD II system is notready and you should not proceed to the I/M station.

b. The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine. This means that your vehicle's OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station.

If your OBD II system is notready, you should see your authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement, you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to update. A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is now ready.

Regardless of whether your vehicle's OBD II system is ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced

before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine running.

REPLACEMENTPARTS

Use of genuine MOPAR® parts for normal/scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to ensure the designed performance. Damage or failures caused by the use of non-MOPAR® parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer's warranty.

DEALERSERVICE

Your authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are available which include detailed service information for your vehicle. Refer to these manuals before attempting any procedure yourself.

NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control systems may void your warranty and could result in civil penalties being assessed against you.

WARNING!

Youcanbebadlyinjuredworkingonorarounda motorvehicle.Onlydoserviceworkforwhichyou havetheknowledgeandtheproperequipment.If youhaveanydoubtaboutyourabilitytoperforma servicejob,takeyourvehicletoacompetentmechanic.

MAINTENANCEPROCEDURES

The pages that follow contain the required maintenance services determined by the engineers who designed your vehicle.

318MAINTAININGYOUR VEHICLE

Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed maintenance schedule, there are other components which may require servicing or replacement in the future.

CAUTION!

- Failuretoproperlymaintainyourvehicleorperformrepairsandservicewhennecessarycould resultinmorecostlyrepairs,damagetoother componentsornegativelyimpactvehicleperformance.Immediatelyhavepotentialmalfunctions examinedbyanaauthorizedChryslerGroupLLC dealershiporqualifiedrepaircenter.

(Continued)

CAUTION!(Continued)

- Yourvehiclehasbeenbuiltwithimprovedfluids thatprotecttheperformanceaddurabilityof yourvehicleandalsoallowextendedmaintenance intervals.Donotusechemicalflushesinthese componentsasthechemicalscandamageyour engine,transmission,powersteeringorairconditioning.SuchdamageisnotcoveredbytheNew VehicleLimitedWarranty.Ifaflushisneeded becauseofcomponentmalfunction,useonlythe specifiedfluidfortheflushingprocedure.

EngineOil

CheckingOilLevel

To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to

check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off or before starting the engine after it has sat overnight.

Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain the oil level in the "SAFE" range. Adding one quart of oil when the reading is at the bottom of the "SAFE" range will result in an oil level at the top of the "SAFE" range on these engines.

NOTE: Fill engine oil one quart at a time.

CAUTION!

• Overfillingorunderfillingwillcauseoilaeration orlossofoilpressure.Thiscoulddamageyour engine.

(Continued)

CAUTION!(Continued)

- Operating the engine with the oil levels below the safezone, or operating with oil level that exceed the top of the safezone may cause engineered damage.

ChangeEngineOil

The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance. Refer to "Maintenance Schedule" for further information.

NOTE: Undernocircumstances should oil change intervalsexceed6,000 miles(10000km) or six months, whichever occurs first.

EngineOilSelection

For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only recommends full synthetic engine oils that meet the

320MAINTAININGYOURVEHICLE

requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-10725 and are approved to MB 229.3 or MB 229.5 (will be listed on the back label of the oil container).

The manufacturer recommends the use of a full synthetic 5W-40 or equivalent engine oil.

CAUTION!

Donotusechemicalflushesinyourengineoilasthe chemicalscandamageyoureengine.Suchdamageis notcoveredbytheNewVehicleLimitedWarranty.

EngineOilViscosity

SAE 5W-40 engine oil is preferred for use in all operating temperatures.

The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compartment” in Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.

SyntheticEngineOils

You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recommended oil quality requirements are met, and the recommended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are followed.

MaterialsAddedtoEngineOil

The manufacturer strongly recommends against the addition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and it's performance may be impaired by supplemental additives.

Disposing of Used Engine Oil and Oil Filters

Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters, indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the environment. Contact your dealer, service station, or governmental agency for advice on how and where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area.

EngineOilFilter

The engine oil filter should be replaced at every engine oil change.

EngineOilFilterSelection

The manufacturer's engines have a full-flow type oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR® engine oil filters are a high quality oil filter and are recommended.

EngineAirCleanerFilter

Refer to "Maintenance Schedule" for further information.

WARNING!

Theaircleanercanprovideameasureofprotection in the case of engine backfire. Donotremovetheair cleaner unless such removal is necessary for repair or maintenance. Makesure that no one is near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air cleaner removed. Failure todos can result in serious personal injury.

EngineAirCleanerFilterSelection

The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR ^® engine air cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recommended.

322MAINTAININGYOURVEHICLE

Maintenance-FreeBattery

Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery. You will never have to add water, nor is periodic maintenance required.

CAUTION!

Itisessentialwhenreplacingthecablesonthe batterythatthepositivecableisattachedtothe positivepostandthenegativecableisattachedtothe negativepost.Batterypostsaremarked(+)positive andnegative(-)andidentifiedonthebatterycase. Also,ifa"fastcharger"isusedwhilebatteryisinthe vehicle,disconnectbothvehiclebatterycablesbefore connectingthechargertobattery.Donotusea"fast charger"toprovidestartingvoltage.

AirConditionerMaintenance

For best possible performance, your air conditioner should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the start of each warm season. This service should include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time.

CAUTION!

Donotusechemicalflushesinyourairconditioning systemasthechemicalscandamageyourairconditioningcomponents.Suchdamageisnotcoveredby theNewVehicleLimitedWarranty.

WARNING!

• Useonlyrefrigerantsandcompressorlubricants approvedbythemanufacturerforyourairconditioningsystem.Someunapprovedrefrigerantsare flammableandcanexplode,injuringyou.Other unapprovedrefrigerantsorlubricantscancause thesystemtofail,requiringcostlyrepairs.Referto WarrantyInformationBook,locatedontheDVD, forfurtherwarrantyinformation.
• The airconditioningsystem contains refrigerant underhigh pressure. To avoid risk of personal injury, damage to the system, adding refrigerant or any repair requiring linestobed disconnected should be done by an experienced repairman.

NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C System Sealers, Stop Leak Products, Seal Conditioners, Compressor Oil, or Refrigerants.

Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling

R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro-carbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. However, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by dealers or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.

BodyLubrication

Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate, tailgate, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease, such as MOPAR® Spray White Lube or equivalent to assure quiet, easy operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed. Particular attention should also be given to hood latching components to ensure proper function.

324MAINTAININGYOURVEHICLE

When performing other underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.

The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR® Lock Cylinder Lubricant or equivalent directly into the lock cylinder.

WindshieldWiperBlades

Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations of salt or road film.

Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield.

Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.

NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor performance of blades may be present with chattering, marks, water lines or wet spots. If any condition is present please proceed to clean wiper blades with humid cloth removing any debris that may be affecting its function.

AddingWasherFluid

On vehicles equipped with a Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), the low washer fluid level will be indicated. When the sensor detects a low fluid level, the windshield will light on the vehicle graphic outline and the "Washer Fluid Low" message will be displayed. Refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information Center" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.

The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and the rear window washer is shared. The fluid reservoir is located in the engine compartment, be sure to check the fluid level at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent only (not radiator antifreeze). When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take some washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe clean the wiper blades, this will help blade performance. To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This rating information can be found on most washer fluid containers.

WARNING!

Commerciallyavailablewindshieldwashersolvents areflammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washers solution.

ExhaustSystem

The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system.

Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,

326MAINTAININGYOURVEHICLE

inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.

WARNING!

Exhaustgasescaninjureorkill. They contain carbon monoxide(CO) which is colorless and odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO, follow the precedings safety tips.

CAUTION!

The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control device and may seriously reduce engine performance and causes serious damage to the engine.

Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter will not require maintenance. However, it is important to keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst damage.

CAUTION!

Damagetothecatalyticconvertercanresultifyour vehicleisnotkeptinproperoperatingcondition.In theeventofenginemalfunction,particularlyinvolvingenginemisfireorotherapparentlossofperformance,haveyourvehicleservicedpromptly.Continuedoperationofyourvehiclewithasevere malfunctioncouldcausetheconvertertooverheat, resultinginpossibledamagetotheconverterandthe vehicle.

NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you.

WARNING!

Ahotexhaustsystemcanstartafireifyouparkover materialsthatcanburn.Suchmaterialsmightbe grassorleavescomingintocontactwithyourehaust system.Donotparkoroperateyourvehicleinareas whereyourehaustsystemcancontactanythingthat canburn.

In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning engine operation, a scorching odor may indicate severe and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, the vehicle should be stopped, the engine shut off and the vehicle allowed to cool. Thereafter, service, including a tune-up to manufacturer's specifications, should be obtained immediately.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE327

To minimize the possibility of catalyst damage:

• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in motion.
• Do not try to start engine by pushing or towing the vehicle.
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough idling or malfunctioning operating conditions.

CoolingSystem

WARNING!

• Whenworkingneartheradiatorcoolingfan, disconnect the fan motor lead to turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. The fan is temperature controlled and can start at any time the ignition switch in the ON position.
• Youorotherscanbebadlyburnedbyhotengine coolant(antifreeze)orsteamfromyourradiator.If youseeorhearsteamcomingfromunderthe hood,donotopenthehooduntiltheradiatorhas hadtimetocool.Nevertrytoopenacooling systempressurecapwhentheradiatorishot.

CoolantChecks

Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or

rusty in appearance, the system should be drained, flushed and refilled with fresh coolant. Check the front of the A/C condenser for any accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the condenser.

Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts and tightness of the connection at the bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for leaks.

With the engine at normal operating temperature (but not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of engine coolant (antifreeze) from the radiator drain cock. If the cap is sealing properly, the engine coolant (anti-freeze) will begin to drain from the coolant recovery bottle. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.

CoolingSystem—Drain,FlushandRefill

If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains a considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with a reliable cooling system cleaner. Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Properly dispose of the old engine coolant (antifreeze).

Refer to "Maintenance Schedule" for further information.

SelectionOfCoolant

Use only the manufacturer's recommended coolant. Refer to "Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts" in "Maintaining Your Vehicle" for further information.

CAUTION!

• Mixingofenginecoolant(antifreeze)otherthan specifiedHOATenginecoolant(antifreeze),may resultinenginedamageandmaydecreasecorrosionprotection.Ifanon-HOATenginecoolant (antifreeze)isintroducedintothecoolingsystem inanemergency,itshouldbereplacedwiththe specifiedenginecoolant(antifreeze)assoonas possible.
• Donotusewateraloneoralcoholbasedengine coolant(antifreeze)products.Donotuseadditionalrustinhibitorsorantirustproducts,asthey maynotbecompatiblewiththeenginecoolant (antifreeze)andmayplugtheradiator.

(Continued)

CAUTION!(Continued)

- This vehicle has not been designed for use with Propylene Glycol based engine coolant (antifreeze). Use of Propylene Glycol based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.

AddingCoolant

Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine coolant (antifreeze) that allows extended maintenance intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used up to 5 Years or 102,000 miles (170 000 km) before replacement. To prevent reducing this extended maintenance period, it is important that you use the same engine coolant (antifreeze) throughout the life of your vehicle. Please review these recommendations for using Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze).

When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):

• The manufacturer recommends using MOPAR® Antifreeze/ Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent.
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% HOAT engine coolant (antifreeze) and distilled water. Use higher concentrations (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below -34^ F ( -37^ C) are anticipated.
• Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized water when mixing the water/engine coolant (antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system.

Please note that it is the owner's responsibility to maintain the proper level of protection against freezing according to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated.

NOTE: Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types will decrease the life of the engine coolant (antifreeze) and will require more frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) changes.

CoolingSystemPressureCap

The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant (antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant recovery bottle.

The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.

WARNING!

• Thewarningwords "DONOTOPENHOT" on thecoolingsystempressurecapareasafetyprecaution. Neveraddenginecoolant (antifreeze) whentheengineisoverheated. Donotloosenor removethecaptocoolanoverheatedengine. Heat causes pressuretobuildupinthecoolingsystem. Topreventscaldingorinjury, donotremovethe pressurecapwhilethesystemishotorunder pressure.
• Donotuseapressurecapotherthantheone specifiedforyourvehicle.Personalinjuryorenginedamagemayresult.

DisposalofUsedEngineCoolant

Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant (antifreeze) is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check with your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by animals or children, do not store ethylene glycol based engine coolant (antifreeze) in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek emergency assistance immediately. Clean up any ground spills immediately.

CoolantLevel

The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the engine off and cold, the level of the engine coolant (antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the ranges indicated on the bottle.

The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point or replacing engine coolant (antifreeze). Advise your service attendant of this. As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month.

When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to maintain the proper level, it should be added to the coolant bottle. Do not overfill.

PointstoRemember

NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles (a few kilometers) of operation, you may observe vapor coming from the front of the engine compartment. This is normally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vaporized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE333

If an examination of your engine compartment shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.

• Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle.
• Check engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point in the radiator and in the coolant recovery bottle. If engine coolant (antifreeze) needs to be added, contents of coolant recovery bottle must also be protected against freezing.

• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are required, or if the level in the coolant recovery bottle does not drop when the engine cools, the cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks.

• Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at 50% HOAT engine coolant (antifreeze) (minimum) and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine which contains aluminum components.

• Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the condenser clean.
• Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install only the correct type thermostat. Other designs may result in unsatisfactory coolant performance, poor gas mileage, and increased emissions.

334MAINTAININGYOURVEHICLE

BrakeSystem

FluidLevelCheck—BrakeMasterCylinder

The fluid level in the master cylinder should be checked whenever the vehicle is serviced, or immediately if the brake system warning light is on. If necessary, add fluid to bring level to the full mark on the side of the reservoir of the brake master cylinder. Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing the cap. With disc brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear. Brake fluid level should be checked when pads are replaced. If the brake fluid level is abnormally low, check system for leaks.

Refer to "Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts" in "Maintaining Your Vehicle" for further information.

WARNING!

- Useonlymanufacturer's recommended brake fluid. Referto "Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts" in "Maintaining Your Vehicle" for further information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid can severely damage your brakes system and/or impair performance. The property of brake fluid for your vehicle is also labeled on the original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir.

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been in tightly closed container. Keep the master cylinder reservoir to secure data all times. Brake fluid a open container absorbsmoisture from the air resulting in lower boiling point. This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake failure. This could result in a accident.
  • Overfillingthebrakefluidreservoircanresultin spillingbrakefluidonhotengineparts, causing thebrakefluidtocatchfire.Brakefluidcanalso damagepaintedandvinylsurfaces,careshouldbe takentoavoiditscontactwiththesesurfaces.

WARNING!(Continued)

- Donotallowpetroleumbasedfluidtocontaminatethebrakefluid.Brakesealcomponentscould bedamaged,causingpartialorcompletebrake failure.Thiscouldresultinanaccident.

AutomaticTransmission

FluidLevelCheck

Regular automatic transmission fluid level checks are not required. For this reason the dipstick is omitted.

If you notice fluid loss or transmission slippage or malfunction, have your authorized dealer check the transmission fluid level.

(Continued)

CAUTION!

Thefluidlevelispresetatthefactoryanddoesnot requireadjustmentundernormaloperatingconditions.Ifatransmissionfluidleakoccurs,visityour authorizeddealerimmediately.Severedamagetothe transmissionmayoccur.Yourauthorizeddealerhas thepropertoolstoaccuratelyadjustthefluidlevel.

AppearanceCareandProtectionfromCorrosion

ProtectionofBodyandPaintfromCorrosion

Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice, and those that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle.

The following maintenance recommendations will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle.

WhatCausesCorrosion?

Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.

The most common causes are:

• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
  • Stone and gravel impact.
  • Insects, tree sap and tar.
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
  • Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.

Washing

• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle in the shade using MOPAR®Car Wash or a mild car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with clear water.
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumulated on your vehicle, use MOPAR®Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover or equivalent to remove.
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR® Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains, and to protect your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.

CAUTION!

• Donotuseabrasiveorstrongcleaningmaterials suchassteelwoolorscouringpowder,whichwill scratchmetalandpaintedsurfaces.
• Useofpowerwashersexceeding1,200psi (8274kPa)canresultindamageorremovalof paintanddecals.

SpecialCare

• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once a month.
• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of the doors, rocker panels and tailgate must be kept clear and open.

338MAINTAININGYOURVEHICLE

• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint, touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner.
• If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or similar cause which destroys the paint and protective coating have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner.
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers, de-icer salt, etc., assure that such materials are well packaged and sealed.
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
• Use MOPAR®Touch Up Paint or equivalent on scratches or chips as soon as possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle.

WheelandWheelTrimCare

All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and chrome-plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion. To remove heavy soil, use MOPAR®Wheel Cleaner or select a nonabrasive, non-acidic cleaner. Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush or metal polishes. Only MOPAR®cleaners or equivalent are recommended. Do not use oven cleaner. Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheels' protective finish.

StainRepelFabricCleaningProcedure—If Equipped

Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following manner:

• Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting with a clean, dry towel.

• Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.

• For tough stains, apply MOPAR® Total Clean or a mild soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove the stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.

• For grease stains, apply MOPAR®Multi-Purpose Cleaner or equivalent to a clean, damp cloth and remove the stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
• Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of protectants on Stain Repel products.

InteriorCare

Use MOPAR®Total Clean or equivalent to clean fabric upholstery and carpeting.

Interior Trim should be cleaned starting with a damp cloth, a damp cloth with MOPAR® Total Clean or equivalent, then MOPAR®Spot & Stain Remover or equivalent if absolutely necessary. Do not use harsh cleaners or Armor All®. Use MOPAR®Total Clean or equivalent to clean vinyl upholstery.

LeatherSeatCare&Cleaning

MOPAR ^® Total Clean or equivalent is specifically recommended for leather upholstery.

Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth. Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and MOPAR®Total Clean or equivalent. Care should be taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or ammonia based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not required to maintain the original condition.

WARNING!

Donotusevolatilesolventsforcleaningpurposes. Manyarepotentiallyflammable,andifusedin closedareastheymaycauserespiratoryharm.

GlassSurfaces

All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with MOPAR®Glass Cleaner or any commercial household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use caution when cleaning inside rear windows equipped with electric defrosters. Do not use scrapers or other sharp instruments which may scratch the elements.

When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror.

CleaningPlasticInstrumentClusterLenses

The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.

1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may be used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp rag.
2. Dry with a soft tissue.

SeatBeltMaintenance

Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric. Sun damage will also weaken the fabric.

If the belts need cleaning, use MOPAR®Total Clean, a mild soap solution, or lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the vehicle to wash them.

Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work properly.

FUSES

InteriorFuses

The fuse panel is on the lower instrument panel just to the left of the steering column.

Interior view of a car dashboard and seat area showing the front panel and side seats (no text or symbols visible)

FusePanel

MAINTAININGYOURVEHICLE341

Cavity	Cartridge Fuse	Mini-Fuse	Description
1 30 Amp		Green	Audio Amp (B+)
2 15 Amp		Blue	Sunroof (B+)
3 10 Amp		Red	Htd Mirror (EBL)
4 20 Amp		Yellow	Rr Pwr Out (B+)
5 10 Amp		Red	Rr HVAC (R/O) (Commander Only)
6 Spare (B+)
7 20 Amp		Yellow	Door Locks (B+)
8 Spare (B+)
9 20 Amp		Yellow	Pwr Outlet (B+)

342MAINTAININGYOURVEHICLE

Cavity	Cartridge Fuse	Mini-Fuse	Description
10 10 Amp		Red	Final Drive Control Module (FDCM), Heater Ventilation/Air Conditioning (HVAC), Rear Heated Seat Switch, O/H, Heater Ventilation/Air Conditioning (HVAC) Relay, Rear Park Assist
11 Spare (B+)
12 10 Amp		Red	Door Mods, O/H Lamps, IP Courtesy Lamps, Glove Box Lamp (B+)
13 10 Amp		Red	Autowipe (R/A)

Cavity	Cartridge Fuse	Mini-Fuse	Description
14 20 Amp		Yellow	Cigar Ltr (R/A)
15 10 Amp		Red	Tire Pressure Transponders (R/O)
16 10 Amp		Red	Upper & Lower Switch Bank, Diag. Connector, Cluster (B+)
17 15 Amp		Blue	Flipper Glass (B+)
19 Spare		(R/S)
20 10 Amp		Red	Steering Column Control Module (SCCM), Cluster (R/S), BUX Trailer Tow
21 Spare		(Acc Delay)
22 15 Amp		Blue	Rear Wiper (B+)
24 10 Amp		Red	Power Distribution Center (PDC) Relays, Powertrain Control Module, A580 (R/S)
25 10 Amp		Red	Shifter Assy (BTSI), Trans. Case Switch, ESP/ABS, Trailer Sway Damp Relay

UnderhoodFuses(PowerDistributionCenter)

Interior view of a car engine bay with visible wiring and components (no text or symbols)

PowerDistributionCenter

Cavity	Cartridge Fuse	Mini-Fuse	Description
150 Amp Red			PTC Heater 1 (Diesel Only)

344 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Cavity	Cartridge Fuse	Mini-Fuse	Description
2 40 Amp Green			HID Headlamps
3 50 Amp Red			PTC Heater 2 (Diesel Only)
4 30 Amp Pink			Power Outlets
5 50 Amp Red			PTC Heater 3 (Diesel Only)
6 30 Amp Pink			Cig Lighter, Trail Tow Batt
7 40 Amp Green			Power Liftgate (Commander Only)
8 40 Amp Green			Starter, JB Power
9 20 Amp Blue			Front Power Windows

Cavity	Cartridge Fuse	Mini-Fuse	Description
10 — Spare
11 40 Amp Green			HVAC Blower
12 30 Amp Pink			Rear Wiper, Ign R/O
13 40 Amp Green			Rear Window Defroster (EBL)/Heated Mirror
14 30 Amp Pink			Rear HVAC – If Equipped
15 — Spare
16 50 Amp Red			ASD
17 30 Amp Pink			ABS Pump

MAINTAININGYOURVEHICLE345

Cavity	Cartridge Fuse	Mini-Fuse	Description
18 40 Amp Green			Accessory Delay, Seats
19 40 Amp Green			JB Power
20 30 Amp Pink			Wiper Motor
21 20 Amp		Yellow	Fuel Pump
22 20 Amp		Yellow	TCM, A/C Clutch
23 25 Amp		Natural	Power Inverter
24 20 Amp		Yellow	Rear Heated Seats
25 20 Amp		Yellow	Final Drive Control Module (FDCM)

Cavity	Cartridge Fuse	Mini-Fuse	Description
26 15 Amp		Blue	Brake Lamps
27 20 Amp		Yellow	HD Washer – If Equipped (Export Only)
28 30 Amp		Green	ABS Valves
29 20 Amp		Yellow	PCM Batt (Gasoline Only)
30 — Spare
31 — Spare
32 15 Amp		Blue	Powertrain Control Module (Diesel Only)
33 20 Amp		Yellow	Final Drive Control Module (FDCM) E-Diff

346MAINTAININGYOURVEHICLE

Cavity	Cartridge Fuse	Mini-Fuse	Description
34 — Spare
35 20 Amp		Yellow	Trail-Tow Mod (Export Only)
36 — Spare
37 20 Amp		Yellow	Ignition Switch
38 20 Amp		Yellow	HID Left
39 20 Amp		Yellow	HID Right
40 25 Amp		Natural	Next Generation Controller (NGC), Injectors
41 20 Amp		Yellow	Subwoofer (SRT Only)
42 — Spare

Cavity	Cartridge Fuse	Mini-Fuse	Description
43 25 Amp		Natural	Coils, Actuators
44 — Spare

UnderhoodFuses(IntegratedPowerModule)

Interior view of a car engine bay with visible wiring and components (no text or symbols)

IntegratedPowerModule

MAINTAININGYOURVEHICLE347

Cavity	Cartridge Fuse	Mini-Fuse	Description
8 10 Amp		Red	Lt Park Lamps
9 10 Amp		Red	Trailer-Tow Park Lamps
10 10 Amp		Red	Rt Park Lamps
12 20 Amp		Yellow	Front Control Module (FCM) Batt #4
13 20 Amp		Yellow	Front Control Module (FCM) Batt #2
14 20 Amp		Yellow	Adjustable Pedal
15 20 Amp		Yellow	Ft Fog Lamps
16 20 Amp		Yellow	Horn

Cavity	Cartridge Fuse	Mini-Fuse	Description
17 20 Amp		Yellow	Rear Fog Lamps (Export Only)
18 20 Amp		Yellow	Front Control Module (FCM) Batt #1
19 20 Amp		Yellow	Lt Trailer-Tow Stop/ Turn
20 20 Amp		Yellow	Front Control Module (FCM) Batt #3
21 20 Amp		Yellow	Rt Trailer-Tow Stop/ Turn
22 30 Amp Pink			Final Drive Control Module (FDCM) MOD
23 50 Amp Red			Radiator Fan

348MAINTAININGYOURVEHICLE

Cavity	Cartridge Fuse	Mini-Fuse	Description
27 15 Amp		Blue	Ignition Off Draw (IOD) #1 — Intrusion Module, Satellite Video, Steering Control Module
28 20 Amp		Yellow	Ignition Off Draw (IOD) #2 — Radio
29 10 Amp		Red	Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) R/S
30 10 Amp		Red	Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) R/O

VEHICLESTORAGE

If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21 days you may want to take steps to protect your battery. You may:

• Remove fuse #27 in the Intelligent Power Module labeled Ignition-Off Draw (IOD#1).
• Or, disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
• Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service (i.e. vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again.

REPLACEMENTBULBS

Headlamps (Low Beam) 9006

Headlamps (High Beam) 9005

Rear Turn/Stop/Tail Lamps 3157K

InteriorLightsBulbType

Glove Box Lamp 194

Grab Handle Lamp L 0 0 2 8 2 5 V

Overhead Console Reading Lamps ..... V T 4 9 7

Rear Cargo Lamp. 214-2

Visor Vanity Lamp V 2 6 3

Underpanel Courtesy Lamps 906

Instrument Cluster (General Illumination) ..... 1 0 3

Telltale/Hazard Lamp 74

NOTE: Numbers refer to commercial bulb types that can be purchased from your authorized dealer.

If a bulb needs to be replaced, visit your authorized 7dæaler or refer to the applicable Service Manual.

BULBREPLACEMENT

HighIntensityDischargeHeadlamps(HID)—If Equipped

ExteriorLightsBulbType

Backup Lamps. 3 1 5 7

Front Park/Turn Lamp. 3757

Front Fog Lamps 9145

Front Side Marker W 5 W

Headlamps (Low Beam) – High Intensity Discharge (HID) ..... D 1 S (ServicedatAuthorizedDealer)

The headlamps are a type of high voltage discharge tube. High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the Headlamp switch off and the key removed. Because of this, you should not attempt to service a headlamp bulb yourself. If a headlamp bulb fails, take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for service.

350MAINTAININGYOURVEHICLE

WARNING!

Atransienthightensionoccursatthebulbsocketsof HighIntensityDischarge(HID)headlampswhenthe headlampswitchisturnedON.Itmaycauseserious electricalshockorelectrocutionifnotservicedproperly.Seeyourauthorizeddealerforservice.

NOTE: On vehicles equipped with High Intensity Discharge (HID) headlamps, when the headlamps are turned on, there is a blue hue to the lamps. This diminishes and becomes more white after approximately 10 seconds, as the system charges.

HalogenHeadlamps—IfEquipped

1. Open the hood.
2. Turn the low or high beam bulb one-quarter turn counterclockwise to remove from housing.

Technical diagram of a mechanical device with numbered components labeled 1, 2, and 3

073305864

1 — High Beam Bulb 3 — Turn Signal Bulb
2 — Low Beam Bulb

1. Disconnect the electrical connector and replace the bulb.

CAUTION!

Donottouchthenewbulbwithyourfingers.Oil contaminationwillseverelyshortenbulblife.Ifthe bulbcomesincontactwithanyoilysurface,cleanthe bulbwithrubbingalcohol.

FrontTurnSignal

1. Open the hood.
2. Turn the turn signal bulb one-quarter turn counterclockwise to remove from housing.

Technical diagram of a mechanical device with numbered components and wiring annotations

073305864

1 — High Beam Bulb 3 — Turn Signal Bulb 2 — Low Beam Bulb
3. Disconnect the electrical connector and replace the bulb.

352MAINTAININGYOURVEHICLE

CAUTION!

Donottouchthenewbulbwithyourfingers.Oil contaminationwillseverelyshortenbulblife.Ifthe bulbcomesincontactwithanyoilysurface,cleanthe bulbwithrubbingalcohol.

CAUTION!

Donottouchthenewbulbwithyourfingers.Oil contaminationwillseverelyshortenbulblife.Ifthe bulbcomesincontactwithanyoilysurface,cleanthe bulbwithrubbingalcohol.

FrontFogLamp

1. Reach behind the front fascia from under the vehicle.
2. Turn the front fog lamp bulb one-quarter turn counterclockwise to remove from housing.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector and replace bulb.

RearTail,Stop,TurnSignal,AndBackupLamps

1. Raise the liftgate.
2. Remove the two Torx fasteners.

MAINTAININGYOURVEHICLE353

Close-up of a car's side panel showing two white arrows pointing to specific parts (no text or symbols visible)

81572594

Technical diagram of a mechanical component with numbered parts labeled 1, 2, and 3.

073305865

1. Squeeze the socket assembly tabs to remove it from the housing.

1 — Tail/Stop Lamp Bulb 3 — Back-Up Lamp Bulb 2 — Tail/Turn Signal Bulb

1. Pull the bulb to remove it from the socket.
2. Replace the bulb, reinstall the socket, and reattach the lamp assembly.

354MAINTAININGYOURVEHICLE

CenterHigh-MountedStopLamp(CHMSL)

1. Remove the two screws securing the CHMSL.

Close-up of a mechanical component with two upward arrows indicating features (no text or symbols)

1. Twist the bulb socket to remove from the CHMSL housing.
2. Pull the bulb out of the socket.
3. Replace the bulb, reinstall the socket and reattach the CHMSL.

FLUIDCAPACITIES

U.S.Metric
Fuel(Approximate)21 Gallons 79 Liters
EngineOilwithFilter
6.1 Liter Engine (SAE 5W-40, API Certified) 7 Quarts 6.6 Liters
CoolingSystem*
6.1 Liter Engine (MOPAR®Engine Coolant/Antifreeze 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)	14.8 Quarts 14 Liters
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.

FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, ANDGENUINEPARTS

Engine

ComponentFluid,Lubricant,orGenuinePart
Engine Coolant MOPAR®Antifreeze/	Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent.
Engine Oil For best performance and m	maximum protection under all types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only recommends full synthetic engine oils that meet the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-10725 and are approved to MB 229.3 or MB 229.5. The manufacturer recommends the use of a full synthetic 5W–40 or equivalent engine oil.
Engine Oil Filter MOPAR®Engine Oil	Filter or equivalent.
Spark Plugs PLZTR5A – 13 (Gap 0.040	in [1.01 mm])
Fuel Selection Premium Unleaded 91	Octane Only or Higher.

Chassis

ComponentFluid,Lubricant,orGenuinePart
Automatic Transmission	MOPAR® ATF+4® Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed ATF+4®product.
Transfer Case MOPAR®NV146 Transfer	Case Fluid or equivalent. Usage of other fluid/lubricants is NOTrecommended.
Axle Differential (Front-Rear)	MOPAR® Synthetic Gear & Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-140 (API-GL5) or equivalent.
Brake Master Cylinder MOPAR®DOT	3 Brake Fluid, SAE J1703 should be used. If DOT 3, SAE J1703 brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. Use only recommended brake fluids.
Power Steering Reservoir This system	requires the use of MOPAR®Hydraulic System Power Steering Fluid or equivalent, which meets Chrysler Material Standard MS-10838.

MAINTENANCESCHEDULES

CONTENTS

■Emissions Control System Maintenance ..... 3 6 0

□Required Maintenance Intervals....362

■Maintenance Schedules 360

360MAINTENANCESCHEDULES

EMISSIONSCONTROLSYSTEMMAINTENANCE

The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in boldtype must be done at the times or mileages specified to ensure the continued proper functioning of the emissions control system. These and all other maintenance services included in this manual, should be done to provide best vehicle performance and reliability. More frequent maintenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating conditions, such as dusty areas and very short trip driving.

Inspection and service should also be done anytime a malfunction is suspected.

NOTE: Maintenance, replacement or repair of the emissions control devices and systems on your vehicle may be performed by any automotive repair establishment or individual using any automotive part that has been certified pursuant to U.S. EPA or in the State of California, California Air Resources Board regulations.

MAINTENANCESCHEDULES

The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.

On Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) equipped vehicles “Oil Change Required” will be displayed in the EVIC and a single chime will sound, indicating that an oil change is necessary.

Based on engine operation conditions the oil change indicator message will illuminate, this means that service is required for your vehicle. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).

NOTE:

- The oil change indicator message will not monitor the time since the last oil change. Change your vehicle's oil if it has been 6 months since your last oil change even if the oil change indicator message is NOT illuminated.

MAINTENANCESCHEDULES361

• Change your engine oil more often if you drive your vehicle off-road for an extended period of time.
• Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 6,000 miles (10,000 km) or 6 months, whichever comes first.

Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by referring to the steps described under “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Oil Change Required” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

At Each Stop for Fuel

- Check the engine oil level about five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off. Checking the oil level while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the

accuracy of the oil level reading. Add oil only when the level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark.

- Check the windshield washer solvent and add if required.

Once a Month

• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or damage.
• Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals as required.
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake master cylinder, and power steering and add as needed.
• Check all lights and other electrical items for correct operation.

362MAINTENANCESCHEDULES

At Each Oil Change

• Change the engine oil filter.
• Inspect the brake hoses and lines.

CAUTION!

Failuretoperformtherequiredmaintenanceitems mayresultindamagetothevehicle.

RequiredMaintenanceIntervals

Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following pages for the required maintenance intervals.

6,000Miles(10,000km)or 6MonthsMaintenanceService Schedule

□Changetheengineoilandengineoil filter.

OdometerReadingDate

RepairOrder#DealerCode

Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

12,000Miles(20,000km)or12MonthsMaintenanceService Schedule

□Changetheengineoilandengineoilfilter.

□Ifusingyourvehicleforanyofthefollowing:Dustyoroff-roadconditions.Inspectthe engineaircleanerfilter;replaceifnecessary.

□Inspectthebrakelinings,replaceifnecessary.

☐InspecttheCVjoints.Performthefirstinspectionat12,000miles(20000km)or12months.

☐Inspectexhaustsystem.Performthefirstinspectionat12,000miles(20000km)or 12months.

☐ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage, wear, improper loosenessorendplay; replace if necessary.

OdometerReadingDate

RepairOrder#DealerCode

Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

364MAINTENANCESCHEDULES

18,000Miles(30,000km)or 18MonthsMaintenance ServiceSchedule

□Changetheengineoilandengineoil filter.

OdometerReadingDate

RepairOrder#DealerCode

Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

24,000Miles(40,000km)or24MonthsMaintenanceService Schedule

□Changetheengineoilandengineoilfilter.

□Ifusingyourvehicleforanyofthefollowing:Dustyoroff-roadconditions.Inspectthe engineaircleanerfilter;replaceifnecessary.

□Inspectthebrakelinings,replaceifnecessary.

□InspecttheCVjoints.

□Inspectexhaustsystem.

☐ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage, wear, improper loosenessorendplay; replace if necessary.

OdometerReadingDate

RepairOrder#DealerCode

Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

30,000Miles(50,000km)or 30MonthsMaintenance ServiceSchedule

□Changetheengineoilandengineoil filter.
□Replacetheengineaircleanerfilter.
Drainthetransfercaseandrefill.
□Adjustparkingbrakeonvehicles equippedwithfour-wheeldiscbrakes.

OdometerReadingDate

RepairOrder#DealerCode

Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

36,000Miles(60,000km)or 36MonthsMaintenance ServiceSchedule

□Changetheengineoilandengineoil filter.
□Ifusingyourvehicleforanyofthe following:Dustyoroff-roadconditions. Inspecttheengineaircleanerfilter; replaceifnecessary.
☐Inspectthebrakelinings,replaceif necessary.
☐Inspectthefrontsuspension, tierodends and bootseals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage, wear, improper loosenessorendplay; replace if necessary.

OdometerReadingDate

RepairOrder#DealerCode

Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

42,000Miles(70,000km)or 42MonthsMaintenance ServiceSchedule

□Changetheengineoilandengineoil filter.

OdometerReadingDate

RepairOrder#DealerCode

SignatureAuthorizedChryslerDealer

366MAINTENANCESCHEDULES

48,000Miles(80,000km)or48MonthsMaintenanceService Schedule

□Changetheengineoilandengineoilfilter.
□Ifusingyourvehicleforanyofthefollowing:Dustyoroff-roadconditions.Inspectthe engineaircleanerfilter;replaceifnecessary.
□Inspectthebrakelinings;replaceifnecessary.
□InspecttheCVjoints.
□Inspectexhaustsystem.
☐ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage, wear, improperloosenessorendplay; replace if necessary.

OdometerReadingDate

RepairOrder#DealerCode

SignatureAuthorizedChryslerDealer

54,000Miles(90,000km)or 54MonthsMaintenance ServiceSchedule

□Changetheengineoilandengineoil filter.

OdometerReadingDate

RepairOrder#DealerCode

Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

60,000Miles(100,000km)or60MonthsMaintenanceService Schedule

□Changetheengineoilandengineoilfilter.
□Replacetheengineaircleanerfilter.
□Inspectthebrakelinings;replaceifnecessary.
□Adjustparkingbrakeonvehiclesequippedwithfour-wheeldiscbrakes.
☐Changetheautomatictransmissionfluidandfilter(s)ifusingyourvehicleforanyofthe following:police,taxi,fleet,orfrequenttrailertowing.
Drainthetransfercaseandrefill.
□Inspecttheaccessorydrivebelt(s),replaceifnecessary.
☐Flushandreplacetheenginecoolantat60monthsifnotdoneat102,000miles (170000km).
☐ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage, wear, improper loosenessorendplay; replace if necessary.

OdometerReadingDate

RepairOrder#DealerCode

Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

66,000Miles(110,000km)or 66MonthsMaintenance ServiceSchedule

□Changetheengineoilandengineoil filter.

OdometerReadingDate

RepairOrder#DealerCode

Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

368MAINTENANCESCHEDULES

72,000Miles(120,000km)or72MonthsMaintenanceService Schedule

□Changetheengineoilandengineoilfilter.

□Ifusingyourvehicleforanyofthefollowing:Dustyoroff-roadconditions.Inspectthe engineaircleanerfilter;replaceifnecessary.

□Inspectthebrakelinings;replaceifnecessary.

□InspecttheCVjoints.

□Inspectexhaustsystem.

☐ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage, wear, improperloosenessorendplay; replace if necessary.

OdometerReadingDate

RepairOrder#DealerCode

SignatureAuthorizedChryslerDealer

78,000Miles(130,000km)or 78MonthsMaintenance ServiceSchedule

□Changetheengineoilandengineoil filter.

OdometerReadingDate

RepairOrder#DealerCode

Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

84,000 Miles (140,000 km) or 84 Months Maintenance Service Schedule

☐Changetheengineoilandengineoil filter.

□Ifusingyourvehicleforanyofthe following:Dustyoroff-roadconditions. Inspecttheengineaircleanerfilter; replaceifnecessary.

□Inspectthebrakelinings;replaceif necessary.

☐Inspectthefrontsuspension, tierodends and bootsealsforcracksorleaksandall partsfordamage, wear, improper loosenessorendplay; replace if necessary.

OdometerReadingDate

RepairOrder#DealerCode

Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

90,000 Miles (150,000 km) or 90 Months Maintenance Service Schedule

□Changetheengineoilandengineoil filter.

□Replacetheengineaircleanerfilter.

☐Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary. †

Drainthetransfercaseandrefill.

□Adjustparkingbrakeonvehicles equippedwithfour-wheeldiscbrakes.

OdometerReadingDate

RepairOrder#DealerCode

Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

370MAINTENANCESCHEDULES

96,000Miles(160,000km)or96MonthsMaintenanceService Schedule

□Changetheengineoilandengineoilfilter.

□Ifusingyourvehicleforanyofthefollowing:Dustyoroff-roadconditions.Inspectthe engineaircleanerfilter;replaceifnecessary.

□Inspectthebrakelinings;replaceifnecessary.

□InspecttheCVjoints.

□Inspectexhaustsystem.

☐ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage, wear, improperloosenessorendplay; replace if necessary.

OdometerReadingDate

RepairOrder#DealerCode

SignatureAuthorizedChryslerDealer

102,000Miles(170,000km)or 102MonthsMaintenance ServiceSchedule

□Changetheengineoilandengineoil filter.

□Replacethesparkplugs.

☐Flushandreplacetheenginecoolantif notdoneat60months.

OdometerReadingDate

RepairOrder#DealerCode

Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

108,000Miles(180,000km)or 108MonthsMaintenance ServiceSchedule

☐Changetheengineoilandengineoil filter.
□Ifusingyourvehicleforanyofthe following:Dustyoroff-roadconditions. Inspecttheengineaircleanerfilter; replaceifnecessary.
□Inspectthebrakelinings;replaceif necessary.
☐Inspectthefrontsuspension, tierodends andbootsealsforcracksorleaksandall partsfordamage, wear, improper loosenessorendplay; replace if necessary.

OdometerReadingDate

RepairOrder#DealerCode

Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

114,000Miles(190,000km)or 114MonthsMaintenance ServiceSchedule

□Changetheengineoilandengineoil filter.

OdometerReadingDate

RepairOrder#DealerCode

Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

372MAINTENANCESCHEDULES

120,000Miles(200,000km)or120MonthsMaintenanceService Schedule

□Changetheengineoilandengineoilfilter.

□Replacetheengineaircleanerfilter.

□Inspectthebrakelinings;replaceifnecessary.

□Adjustparkingbrakeonvehiclesequippedwithfour-wheeldiscbrakes.

□InspecttheCVjoints.

□Inspectexhaustsystem.

□Changetheautomatictransmissionfluidandfilter.

☐ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage, wear, improperloosenessorendplay; replace if necessary.

Drainthetransfercaseandrefill.

□Inspecttheaccessorydrivebelt(s),replaceifnecessary.

OdometerReadingDate

RepairOrder#DealerCode

SignatureAuthorizedChryslerDealer

126,000Miles(210,000km)or 126MonthsMaintenance ServiceSchedule

□Changetheengineoilandengineoil filter.

OdometerReadingDate

RepairOrder#DealerCode

Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

132,000Miles(220,000km)or 132MonthsMaintenance ServiceSchedule

☐Changetheengineoilandengineoil filter.
□Ifusingyourvehicleforanyofthe following:Dustyoroff-roadconditions. Inspecttheengineaircleanerfilter; replaceifnecessary.
□Inspectthebrakelinings;replaceif necessary.
☐Inspectthefrontsuspension, tierodends andbootsealsforcracksorleaksandall partsfordamage, wear, improper loosenessorendplay; replace if necessary.

OdometerReadingDate

RepairOrder#DealerCode

Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

138,000Miles(230,000km)or 138MonthsMaintenance ServiceSchedule

□Changetheengineoilandengineoil filter.

OdometerReadingDate

RepairOrder#DealerCode

Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

374MAINTENANCESCHEDULES

144,000Miles(240,000km)or144MonthsMaintenanceService Schedule

□Changetheengineoilandengineoilfilter.

□Ifusingyourvehicleforanyofthefollowing:Dustyoroff-roadconditions.Inspectthe engineaircleanerfilter;replaceifnecessary.

□Inspectthebrakelinings;replaceifnecessary.

□InspecttheCVjoints.

□Inspectexhaustsystem.

☐ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage, wear, improper loosenessorendplay; replace if necessary.

OdometerReadingDate

RepairOrder#DealerCode

SignatureAuthorizedChryslerDealer

150,000Miles(250,000km)or 150MonthsMaintenance ServiceSchedule

□Changetheengineoilandengineoil filter.

□Replacetheengineaircleanerfilter.

Drainthetransfercaseandrefill.

□Adjustparkingbrakeonvehicles equippedwithfour-wheeldiscbrakes.

OdometerReadingDate

RepairOrder#DealerCode

Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

† This maintenance is recommended by the manufacturer to the owner, but is not required to maintain emissions warranty.

WARNING!

• Youcanbebadlyinjuredworkingonorarounda motorvehicle.Doonlyserviceworkforwhichyou havetheknowledgeandtherightequipment.If youhaveanydoubtaboutyourabilitytoperform aservicejob,takeyourvehicletoacompetent mechanic.
• Failuretoproperlyinspectandmaintainyour vehiclecouldresultinacomponentmalfunction andeffectvehiclehandlingandperformance.This couldcauseanaccident

IFYOUNEEDCONSUMERASSISTANCE

CONTENTS

■Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your Vehicle 379

□Prepare For The Appointment.... 379

□Prepare A List.... 379

□Be Reasonable With Requests.... 379

■If You Need Assistance.... 379

□Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center ..... 3 8 0

□ Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center ..... 380

□ In Mexico Contact 380

□Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY).... 381

□ServiceContract 381

■Warranty Information (U.S. Vehicles Only) . . . . 3 8 2

■ MOPAR® Parts 382

■ Reporting Safety Defects 382

□In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C. 382

□In Canada 383

■ Publication Order Forms 383

378IFYOUNEEDCONSUMERASSISTANCE

■Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire
Quality Grades 385
□Treadwear.... 385

□Traction Grades 385
□Temperature Grades.... 386

SUGGESTIONSFOROBTAININGSERVICEFOR YOURVEHICLE

PrepareForTheAppointment

If you're having warranty work done, be sure to have the right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle's service history. This can often provide a clue to the current problem.

PrepareAList

Make a written list of your vehicle's problems or the specific work you want done. If you've had an accident or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the service advisor know.

BeReasonableWithRequests

If you list a number of items and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with the service advisor and list the items in order of priority. At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment.

IFYOUNEEDASSISTANCE

The manufacturer and its authorized dealers are vitally interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy with our products and services.

Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer. We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality service. The manufacturer's authorized dealers have the facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner.

380IFYOUNEEDCONSUMERASSISTANCE

This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer's service manager first. Most matters can be resolved with this process.

• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the general manager or owner of the authorized dealership. They want to know if you need assistance.
• If an authorized dealership is unable to resolve the concern, you may contact the manufacturer's customer center.

Any communication to the manufacturer's customer center should include the following information:

• Owner's name and address
• Owner's telephone number (home and office)
  • Authorized dealership name
  • Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

• Vehicle delivery date and mileage

ChryslerGroupLLCCustomerCenter

P.O. Box 21-8004

Auburn Hills, MI 48321-8004

Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6

Phone: [phone]

InMexicocontact:

In Mexico City: 5081-7568

Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300

CustomerAssistanceForTheHearingOrSpeech Impaired(TDD/TTY)

To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.

Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for Voice callers, dial 1 800 855-0511 to connect with a Bell Relay Service operator.

ServiceContract

You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs after the manufacturer's New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only the manufacturer's service contracts. If you purchased a manufacturer's service contract, you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you have any questions about the service contract, call the manufacturer's Service Contract National Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922.

The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer's service contract. It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer's service contract. If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer's service contract, and you require service after the manufacturer's New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the contract documents, and contact the person listed in those documents.

382IFYOUNEEDCONSUMERASSISTANCE

We appreciate that you have made a major investment when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with the ownership experience. You'll be pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related concerns.

WARNING!

Engineexhaust, some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components contain, ormit, chemicals known to the State of Californiatocause cancer and birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain product of component wear contain, ormit, chemicals known to the State of Californiatocause cancer and birth defects, or other reproductive harm.

WARRANTYINFORMATION(U.S.VehiclesOnly)

See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the DVD, for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle.

MOPAR®PARTS

MOPAR® fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are available from an authorized dealer. They are recommended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle operating at its best.

REPORTINGSAFETYDEFECTS

Inthe50UnitedStatesandWashington,D.C.

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the manufacturer.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your authorized dealer, and the manufacturer.

To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.

InCanada

If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you should contact the Customer Service Department immediately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect to the Canadian government should write to: Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls, 2780 Sheffield Road, Ottawa, Ontario K1B 3V9.

PUBLICATIONORDERFORMS

To order the following manuals, you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mastercard, American Express, and Discover orders are accepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call for an order form.

NOTE:A street address is required when ordering manuals (no P.O. Boxes).

• ServiceManuals

384IFYOUNEEDCONSUMERASSISTANCE

These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the information that students and professional technicians need in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintaining, servicing, and repairing Chrysler Group LLC vehicles. A complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system, and/or components is written in straightforward language with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.

• DiagnosticProcedureManuals

Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and features. They show exactly how to find and correct problems the first time, using step-by-step troubleshooting and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and equipment.

- Owner'sManuals

These Owner's Manuals have been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC vehicles. Included are starting, operating, emergency and maintenance procedures as well as specifications, capabilities and safety tips.

Call toll free at:

• 1-800-890-4038(U.S.)
• 1-800-387-1143(Canada)

Or

Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:

- www.techauthority.com

DEPARTMENTOFTRANSPORTATIONUNIFORM TIREQUALITYGRADES

The following tire grading categories were established by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The specific grade rating assigned by the tire's manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your vehicle.

All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety requirements in addition to these grades.

Treadwear

The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices, and differences in road characteristics and climate.

TractionGrades

The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.

WARNING!

Thetractiongradeassignedtothistireisbasedon straight-aheadbrakingtractiontests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peaktraction characteristics.

386IFYOUNEEDCONSUMERASSISTANCE

TemperatureGrades

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel, than the minimum required by law.

WARNING!

Thetemperaturegradeforthistireisestablished for atirethatisproperlyinflatedandnotoverloaded. Excessivespeed,under-inflation,orexcessiveloading,eitherseparatelyorincombination,cancause heatbuildupandpossibletirefailure.

INDEX

ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System)....159,252

Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze)....3 3 0

Adding Fuel 287

Additives, Fuel 285

Adjustable Pedals 1 1 4

Air Conditioner Maintenance....3 2 2

Air Conditioning, Operating Tips ..... 2 3 2

Air Conditioning Refrigerant....3 2 3

Air Pressure, Tires 274

Airbag 45,54

Airbag Deployment 55

Airbag Light....46,53,58,73,159

Airbag Maintenance 57

Airbag, Side 51,54

Airbag, Window (Side Curtain) ..... 48,51,54

Alarm, Panic 22

Alarm (Security Alarm) 17,159

Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle 8

Antenna, Satellite Radio 216

Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) 329,355

Disposal 3 3 2

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)....252,255

Anti-Lock Warning Light 159

Anti-Theft System 159

Appearance Care 336

Arming Theft System (Security Alarm) ..... 17

Auto Down Power Windows....30

Automatic Dimming Mirror 80

Automatic Door Locks....2 8

Automatic Headlights 101

Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) ..... 225

Automatic Transmission.... 242,335

Fluid Level Check 335

Autostick 245

Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) ..... 1 3 7

Auxiliary Power Outlet 137

Battery 322

INDEX 389

Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) ..... 2 2

Saving Feature (Protection)....104

Belts, Seat 36,72

Body Mechanism Lubrication 323

B-Pillar Location 268

Brake Assist System 256

Brake Control System, Electronic 255

Brake System 334

Anti-Lock (ABS) 252,255

Fluid Check....3 3 4

Master Cylinder....3 3 4

Parking 250

Warning Light....156

Brake/Transmission Interlock 241

Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle ..... 7 0

Bulb Replacement 349

Bulbs, Light 73

Calibration, Compass ..... 1 7 7

Camera, Rear 125

Capacities, Fluid 355

Caps, Filler Fuel 287
Power Steering 249
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) 3 3 1

Car Washes 337

Carbon Monoxide Warning 71,286

Cargo Area Cover 144

Cargo Area Features 143

Cargo Compartment 143

Light 143

Cargo Light 143

Cargo Load Floor 147

Cargo Tie-Downs 146

Cellular Phone 83,225

Center High Mounted Stop Light 354

Chart, Tire Sizing 264

390INDEX

Check Engine Light

(Malfunction Indicator Light)....315

Checking Your Vehicle For Safety ..... 7 1

Checks, Safety 71

Child Restraint....60,61,66,68

Child Restraint Tether Anchors ..... 65,66

Child Safety Locks 28

Clean Air Gasoline 283

Climate Control 2 2 5

Clock....185,187,190,199

Cold Weather Operation 239

Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance ..... 2 2 4

Compass 177

Compass Calibration 177

Compass Variance....178

Computer, Trip/Travel 171

Connector

U C I 210

Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) ..... 2 1 0 Daytime Running Lights ..... 1 0 3

Console, Overhead 127

Contract, Service 381

Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) 3 3 1

Cooling System 328

Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) 3 3 0

Coolant Capacity 355

Coolant Level 328,332

Disposal of Used Coolant 3 3 2

Drain, Flush, and Refill 329

Inspection 332

Points to Remember 332

Pressure Cap 3 3 1

Radiator Cap 331

Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) ..... 329,355

INDEX391

Dealer Service 317

Defroster, Rear Window....149

Defroster, Windshield ..... 73,230

Diagnostic System, Onboard ..... 3 1 4

Dimmer Switch, Headlight 106

Dipsticks Power Steering....2 4 9

Disabled Vehicle Towing 309

Disarming, Theft System....18

Disposal Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) 3 3

Door Locks....26

Door Locks, Automatic 28

Door Opener, Garage 128

Electric Remote Mirrors 82

Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power Outlet) ..... 1 3 7

Electronic Brake Control System ..... 2 5 5

Anti-Lock Brake System....255

Brake Assist System 256

Electronic Roll Mitigation 257

Electronic Stability Program 257

Traction Control System 255

Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) 257

Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) ..... 11 6

Electronic Stability Program (ESP) 257

Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light 165

Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) 163,166

2 Emergency, In Case of

Freeing Vehicle When Stuck....2 4 4

Hazard Warning Flasher 302

Jump Starting 304

Tow Hooks 308

Emission Control System Maintenance ..... 315,360

Engine

Air Cleaner Filter 321

Break-In Recommendations....70

Checking Oil Level 318

Compartment....3 1 3

Compartment Identification....3 1 3

Coolant (Antifreeze) 328

Cooling....328

Exhaust Gas Caution....71,286

Fails to Start 239

Flooded, Starting 239

Fuel Requirements....282,355

Jump Starting 304

Oil 318,3

Oil Change Interval....3 1 9

Oil Selection 319,355

Overheating 30

Starting 23

Temperature Gauge 162

Engine Oil Viscosity 320

Engine Oil Viscosity Chart....3 2 0

Enhanced Accident Response Feature ..... 5 5

Entry System, Illuminated ..... 1 8

Ethanol 283

Exhaust Gas Caution 71,286,326

Exhaust System 71,325

Exterior Finish Care 337

Exterior Lights 73

Filters

Air Cleaner 321

Engine Oil 321

Engine Oil Disposal 321

Finish Care 337

Flashers....302

Hazard Warning....302

Turn Signal 73,157,351,352

Flipper Glass, Liftgate 3 3

Flooded Engine Starting 239

Fluid, Brake 334

Fluid Capacities 355

INDEX393

Fluid Leaks 73

Fluid Level Checks

Brake 334

Cooling System 328

Engine Oil 318

Power Steering 249

Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts ..... 3 5 6

Fog Light Service 35

Fog Lights....105,165,352

Folding Rear Seat 9 1

Four-Way Hazard Flasher 302

Freeing A Stuck Vehicle....2 4 4

Front Heated Seats 8 8

Fuel 282

Additives 285Gauges

Clean Air 283

Ethanol 283

Filler Cap (Gas Cap) 287

Gasoline 282

Gauge....165

Materials Added 285

Methanol 283

Octane Rating 282

Requirements 282,355

Tank Capacity 355

Fuel System Caution 287

Fuses 341

Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®) 128

Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) 287,288,314

Gasoline, Clean Air 283

Gasoline (Fuel) 282

Gasoline, Reformulated 283

Gauges

Coolant Temperature....162

Fuel 165

Speedometer 156

Tachometer 159

Gear Ranges 243

General Information....17,23,282

Glass Cleaning 340

Gross Axle Weight Rating 29

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating 289

Hitches

Trailer Towing 292

Holder, Cup 143

HomeLink® (Garage Door Opener) Transmitter . . . 128

Hood Release....98

Hands-Free Phone (UconnectTM) 83

Hazard Warning Flasher....302

Head Restraints 87

Head Rests 87

Headlights....100,349

Bulb Replacement 35

On With Wipers....101

Replacing....350

Heated Mirrors 82

Heated Seats 88,90

High Beam Indicator....157

High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch . . 106

Ignition 13

Key 12,13

Ignition Key Removal 13

Illuminated Entry 18

Immobilizer (Sentry Key)....15

Infant Restraint 60,61

Inflation Pressure Tires 274

Information Center, Vehicle 166

Instrument Cluster....155,156

Instrument Panel and Controls 154

Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning 340

Integrated Power Module (Fuses) 346

Interior Appearance Care 339

INDEX395

Interior Fuses 341

Interior Lighting 107

Interior Lights 107

Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers)....1 1 0

Introduction 4

Inverter, Power 140

Jump Starting 304

Key, Programming....16

Key, Replacement.... 16

Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) 15

Key-In Reminder 15

Keyless Entry System....19

Keys....12

Kicker Sound System 220

Knee Bolster 46

Lane Change Assist....106

Lap/Shoulder Belts 36

LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tether for

CHILDREN) 65,66

Latches....73

Lead Free Gasoline 282

Leaks, Fluid 73

Life of Tires 277

Liftgate 32

Liftgate Flipper Glass 3 3

Liftgate Window Wiper/Washer....148

Light Bulbs 73

Lights 73,100

Airbag 46,53,58,73,159

Anti-Lock 159

Automatic Headlights 101

Back-Up 352

Battery Saver 104

Brake Assist Warning 163,260

Brake Warning.... 156

396INDEX

Bulb Replacement 349

Cargo 1

Center Mounted Stop 354

Cruise....164

Daytime Running....103

Dimmer Switch, Headlight ..... 100,106

Electronic Stability Program (ESP)

Indicator 160,163,260

Electronic Throttle Control Warning ..... 1 6 5

Exterior 73

Fog 105,165,352

Fuses....341

Hazard Warning Flasher 302

Headlight Switch 100

Headlights....349,350

Headlights On With Wipers....101

High Beam Indicator 157

Illuminated Entry 18

Instrument Cluster 100

Interior 107

4 3Lights On Reminder....104

Low Fuel....166

Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) ..... 1 5 8

Map Reading....108

Oil Pressure 160

Passing....106

Reading....108,127

Rear Servicing....352

Rear Tail 352

Seat Belt Reminder 164

Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) 159

Service 349

Service Engine Soon (Malfunction Indicator) ... 158

Side Marker 352

SmartBeams 102

Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) 160

Traction Control....160,260

Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73,100,106,351,352

INDEX 397

Vanity Mirror 83

Voltage....166

Load Floor, Cargo 147

Loading Vehicle Tires ....

Locks....26

Automatic Door 28

Child Protection 28

Door....26

Power Door 27

Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren

(LATCH) 65,66

Lubrication, Body 323

Lumbar Support 85

Maintenance Free Battery 322

Maintenance Procedures 31

Maintenance Schedule 360

Maintenance Schedules 36

Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . 158,315

Manual, Service 383

Memory Feature (Memory Seat) 94

Memory Seat 94

Memory Seats and Radio 94

Methanol 283

Mini-Trip Computer ..... 1 7 1

Mirrors 80

Automatic Dimming 80

Electric Powered 82

Electric Remote 82

Exterior Folding 81

Heated 82

Outside 81

Vanity 83

Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle ..... 8

Monitor, Tire Pressure System ..... 2 7 9

Mopar Parts 317,382

MTBE/ETBE 28

Multi-Function Control Lever....100

New Vehicle Break-In Period 70

Occupant Restraints....34,51,55

Occupant Restraints (Sedan)....48,51,54

Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) 282

Odometer....163,164

Trip 163

Oil, Engine 318

Capacity 355

Change Interval....3 1 9

Checking....318

Disposal 321

Filter 321

Filter Disposal....3 2 1

Materials Added to 320

Pressure Warning Light 16

Recommendation.... 319,355

Viscosity 355

Onboard Diagnostic System 314,315

Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink®) 128

Operator Manual (Owner's Manual) 5

Outside Rearview Mirrors 81

Overhead Console 127

Overheating, Engine ..... 162,302

Owner's Manual (Operator Manual) ..... 5,383

6 3

Paint Care 3 3 6

Paint Damage 336

Panic Alarm 2 2

Park Sense System, Rear ..... 11 9

Parking Brake 250

Passing Light 106

Pedals, Adjustable 11 4

Personal Settings 179

Pets 70

Pets, Transporting 70

INDEX399

Phone, Cellular 83

Phone, Hands-Free (UconnectTM) 83

Placard, Tire and Loading Information ..... 2 6 8

Polishing and Waxing 3 3 7

Power Distribution Center (Fuses)....3 4 3

Door Locks 27

Inverter....140

Mirrors 82

Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) ..... 1 3 7

Seats 85,86

Steering 248,249

Sunroof....135

Windows 29

Pregnant Women and Seat Belts ..... 4 4

Pretensioners Seat Belts 43

Programmable Electronic Features ..... 1 7 9

Programming Transmitters (Remote Keyless Entry).... 1 9

Radial Ply Tires 275

Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap)....3 3 1

Radio Operation 225

Radio, Satellite (Uconnect®studios) 215

Rain Sensitive Wiper System ..... 11 2

Rear Camera 125

Rear Cupholder 143

Rear Heated Seats 90

Rear Park Sense System....11 9

Rear Seat, Folding 91

Rear Window Defroster 149

Rear Window Features....148

Rear Wiper/Washer 148

Reclining Front Seats 84

Recreational Towing 299

Reformulated Gasoline 28

400INDEX

Refrigerant....3 2 3

Reminder, Lights On 104

Reminder, Seat Belt 43

Remote Control Starting System 24

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)....19

Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls ..... 2 2 3

Remote Starting System 24

Replacement Bulbs 349

Replacement Keys 16

Replacement Parts 317

Replacement Tires 277

Reporting Safety Defects 382

Restraints, Child 60

Restraints, Occupant 34

Retractable Cargo Area Cover ..... 1 4 4

Rocking Vehicle When Stuck 244

Roll Over Warning 4

Rotation, Tires....278

Run Flat Feature 272

Safety Checks Inside Vehicle 72

Safety Checks Outside Vehicle 73

Safety Defects, Reporting 382

Safety, Exhaust Gas 71

Safety Information, Tire 262

Safety Tips 71

Satellite Radio Antenna 216

Satellite Radio (Uconnect®studios) ..... 2 1 5

Schedule, Maintenance 360

Seat Belt Reminder 43

Seat Belts 36,72

Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage ..... 4 1

And Pregnant Women 44

Child Restraint 60,68

Extender 4 4

Front Seat 36

Inspection 72

INDEX401

Maintenance 340
Pretensioners....43
Reminder 164
Shoulder Belt Anchorage ..... 4 1
Seats 83
Adjustment 84
Cleaning 339
Easy Entry 97
Head Restraints....87
Heated 88,90
Lumbar Support....85
Memory 94
Power....85,86
Rear Folding....9 1
Reclining 84
Security Against Theft 17
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm)....17,159
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) 329
Selection of Oil....3 1 9

Sentry Key (Immobilizer) 15
Sentry Key Programming....16
Sentry Key Replacement....16
Service Assistance....379
Service Contract 381
Service Engine Soon Light
(Malfunction Indicator) 158
Service Manuals 383
Setting the Clock.... 185,187,190,199
Settings, Personal 179
Shift Lock Manual Override....241
Shifting 240
Automatic Transmission....240
Shoulder Belts 36
Signals, Turn 73,106,157,351,352
SmartBeams 102
Sound System
Kicker 220
Speed Control (Cruise Control) ..... 11 6

402INDEX

Speedometer....156 Sunglasses Storage....128

Starting 24,238 Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag 45

Automatic Transmission....2 3 8 Sway Control, Trailer....2 6 0

Cold Weather 239 System, Remote Starting 24

Engine Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 3 9

Remote....24 Tachometer....159

Steering Telescoping Steering Column ..... 1 1 3

Power....248,249 Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) .... 225

Tilt Column 1 1 3 Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant 1 6 2

Wheel, Tilt 1 1 3 Tether Anchor, Child Restraint 6 5

Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Theft System Arming 17

Controls.... 2 2 3 Theft System Disarming.... 1 8

Storage 348 Tie Down Hooks, Cargo 146

Storage, Behind the Seat 144 Tilt Steering Column 113

Storage Bin....144 Time Delay, Headlight....107

Storage Compartment, Center Seat . . . . . . . . . . 9 3 Tire and Loading Information Placard . . . . . . . . 2 6 8

Storage, Vehicle 233,348 Tire Identification Number (TIN) 266

Storing Your Vehicle 348 Tire Markings 262

Sun Roof 135 Tire Safety Information 262

INDEX403

Tires 73,272,38Bowing 289,309
Air Pressure 274
General Information 272
High Speed 275
Inflation Pressures 274
Life of Tires 277
Load Capacity 268,269
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) 279
Pressure Warning Light....160
Quality Grading 385
Radial 275
Replacement 277
Rotation....278
Safety 262
Sizes 264
Spinning 276
Tread Wear Indicators 276
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight 293 Transmission 335
Tow Hooks, Emergency 308 Automatic 242,335

404INDEX

Shifting 240

Transmitter Battery Service

(Remote Keyless Entry)....2 2

Transmitter, Garage Door Opener

(HomeLink®) 12

Transmitter Programming

(Remote Keyless Entry)....19

Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) ..... 1 9

Tread Wear Indicators 276

Turn Signals....106,157,351,352

UCI Connector 210

Uconnect™ (Hands-Free Phone) 83

Underhood Fuses 343,346

Uniform Tire Quality Grades 385

Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector . . . 210

Universal Transmitter 128

Unleaded Gasoline 282

Upholstery Care 339

Vanity Mirrors 83

Variance, Compass....178

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) 7

Vehicle Loading 269

3Vehicle Modifications/Alterations 8

Vehicle Storage 233,348

Viscosity, Engine Oil 320

Voice Recognition System (VR) 83

Warning Flasher, Hazard 302

Warning, Roll Over 4

Warnings and Cautions 7

Warranty Information 382

Washers, Windshield 109,324

Washing Vehicle 337

Waxing and Polishing 337

Wheel and Wheel Trim 3 3 8

Wheel and Wheel Trim Care 3 3 8

Wind Buffeting 32,137

INDEX405

Window Fogging....2 3 2 Windshield Wiper Blades....3 2 4
Windows....29 Windshield Wipers....109
Power....29 Wiper Blade Replacement....324
Windshield Defroster....73,230 Wipers, Intermittent....1 1 0
Windshield Washers....109 Wipers, Rain Sensitive....112
Fluid 324

CHRYSLER SERVICE

STICK WITH THE SPECIALISTS®

Chrysler Group

10WK742-126-AB

2nd Edition

Printed in U.S.A.